2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH

® 2017 17BAFX-124-AC FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH ©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Third Edition Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCAfeatures and equipment that are either standard or op- US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCAtional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please DRIVING AND ALCOHOL disregard any features and equipment described in this Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of manual that are not on this vehicle. accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- portation. factured.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat 124 Spider. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your vehicle. You are advised to take the time to read these publications carefully before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and transmission; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle over time. After reading it, you are advised to keep the Owner’s Manual inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains in the vehicle should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that FCA offers to its customers, and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at FCA. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all models of the vehicle; please consider only the information relevant to your vehicle’s trim level, engine and model. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA can modify the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial purposes. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Read This Carefully REFUELING Only refuel with unleaded gasoline with a recommended rating of 91 octane. A rating less than 87 octane is not acceptable. Do not use gasoline containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and handling issues, as well as damage fundamental components of the fuel supply system.

STARTING THE ENGINE

If equipped with a manual transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged; place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed. If equipped with an automatic transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that the gear selector is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), depress the brake pedal, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is equipped with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Contact your authorized dealer if you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery) after buying the vehicle. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs are unchanged over time. How To Use This Manual ESSENTIAL INFORMATION Each time directions (left/right or forward/backwards) are listed, they are determined by facing forward from the rear of the vehicle or as from the point of view of being seated inside the car. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text. The figures in the Owner’s Manual are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Owner’s Manual has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position of some controls or elements is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner’s Manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified by graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A key showing the order of the chapter and the corresponding tab symbols appears on another page. SYMBOLS While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety

Vehicle Safety Vehicle Modifications / Alterations

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that burden the electrical supply, contact your authorized dealer, whose personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required , or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate aerial is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. The use of these devices inside the vehicle (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the vehicle safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Advanced Keyless Entry System may occur. CELL PHONE WARNING Note: Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country. Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

01020304-000-100AB Front View 1 — Wheels And Tires 3 — Headlights 5 — Convertible Top 2 — Windshield Wiper Blades 4 — Engine Compartment

9 REAR VIEW

01020304-001-100AB Rear View 1 — Decklid 3 — Exterior Mirror 2 — Taillight 4 — Wheels/Tires

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

02010200-129-555AB Instrument Panel 1 — Turn Signal/High Beams Lever 4 — Hazard Warning Lights Button 7 — Driver Air Bag 2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Passenger Air Bag 3 — Windshield Wiper And Washers 6 — Ignition Switch

11 INTERIOR OVERVIEW

01020304-002-100AB Interior Overview 1 — Instrument Cluster 4 — Climate Control System 7 — Seats 2 — Steering Wheel 5 — Transmission Gear Selector 8 — Radio Controls 3 — Radio Systems 6 — Parking Brake

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS ...... 14 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 20 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 24 DOORS...... 26 SEATS...... 33 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 34 STEERING WHEEL ...... 35 MIRRORS ...... 35 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 38 WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER .42 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....45 POWER WINDOWS ...... 56 HOMELINK — IF EQUIPPED .....58 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 60 TRUNKLID...... 66 TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE . . .68 HOOD ...... 68 CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) . .70 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ....74 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 74

13 KEYS To use the Emergency Key, push the Do not leave children or animals inside mechanical latch on the back side of Key Fob parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat the key fob and pull the emergency key build-up may cause serious injury or death. A code number is stamped on the plate out that's housed inside the key fob. attached to the key set; detach this Note: Key Fob Functions plate and store it in a safe place (not in the vehicle) for use if you need to make Always keep a spare key fob in With A Vehicle Security Alarm a replacement Emergency Key. case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, see System Also, write down the code number and an authorized dealer as soon as The hazard warning lights flash when keep it in a separate safe and possible. the vehicle security alarm system is convenient place, but not in the vehicle. The driver must carry the key fob to armed or disarmed. If your key fob is lost, contact an ensure the Keyless Entry System With Advanced Keyless Function authorized dealer and have your code functions properly. A beep can be heard for confirmation number ready. when the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel Note: Your key fob configuration may filler door are locked/unlocked using the vary with different feature button icons as Warning! key fob. The beep indication volume well as the total number of feature can be adjusted or turned off. buttons depending on your vehicle Use the following procedure to change options/features. Key fob example as Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the the beep setting: shown. automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear or 1. Verify or place the ignition in the OFF REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the position and close both of the doors GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE engine OFF, remove the key fob from the and the trunk lid. vehicle and lock your vehicle. 2. Open the driver's door. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the Allowing children to be in a vehicle driver's door, push and hold the lock unattended is dangerous for a number of button on the key fob for five seconds reasons. A child or others could be or longer. seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, Note: brake pedal or the gear selector. 04010100-361-002AB Both of the doors, the trunk lid, and Key Fob Do not leave the key fob in or near the fuel filler door will lock and the beep 1 — Emergency Key vehicle, or in a location accessible to sound activates at the currently set 2 — Key Fob children. A child could operate power volume (if the beep is currently set to 3 — Key Code Number Plate windows, other controls, or move the not activate, it will not activate). vehicle. 14 The setting changes each time the Unlock Button 5. Pushing any button except the lock button on the key fob is pushed To unlock the doors and the trunk lid, unlock button on the key fob. and the beep sound activates at the push the unlock button and the hazard 6. Pushing a request switch on the set volume (if the beep sound has warning lights will flash twice. been set to not activate, it will not exterior door handle. The system can be set to unlock both Trunk Button activate). doors. Use the following procedure to Setting change is completed by doing change the setting: To open the trunk lid, push and hold the any one of the following: trunk button until the trunk lid opens. 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position Panic Button Placing the ignition to ACC or ON and close both of the doors and the position. To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or trunk lid. off, push and hold the panic button on Closing the driver's door. 2. Open the driver's door. the key fob for at least one second and Opening the trunk lid. release. When the Panic Alarm is on, 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the the headlights will turn on, the park Not operating the key fob for ten driver's door, push and hold the unlock lights will flash, the horn will pulse on seconds. button on the key fob for five seconds and off, and the turn signal lights will or longer. Pushing any button, except the lock flash. button on the key fob. Note: The sound of the doors Note: The panic button will work locking/unlocking can be heard. After whether any door or the trunk lid is Pushing a request switch on the open or closed. exterior door handle. this, the system changes the setting each time the unlock button is pushed Turning On The Alarm Note: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With (the sound of the doors locking/ Pushing the panic button for one Advanced Keyless Entry Function — If unlocking can be heard). second or more will trigger the alarm for Equipped” in “Doors” for further The setting change can be about two minutes and thirty seconds, information. completed by doing any one of the and the following will occur: The operation indicator light flashes following: The horn sounds intermittently. when the buttons are pushed. 1. Placing the ignition in the ACC or The hazard warning lights flash. Key Fob Buttons ON position. Turning Off The Alarm Lock Button 2. Closing the driver’s door. The alarm will stop by pushing any To lock the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel button on the key fob. filler door, push the lock button and the 3. Opening the trunk lid. hazard warning lights will flash once 4. Not operating the key fob for ten and a beep will be heard. seconds.

15 Operational Range Note: The engine may not start if the The system's operational range is key fob is placed in or around the reduced. The system operates only when the following areas: driver is in the vehicle or within Note: Replacing the battery at an operational range while the key fob is Around The Instrument Panel authorized dealer is recommended to being carried or on your person. prevent damage to the key fob. If In The Storage Compartments replacing the battery by yourself, follow Starting The Engine the instruction below. Starting the engine may be possible Key Suspend Function Replacing The Key Fob Battery even if the key fob is outside of the If a key fob is left in the vehicle, the vehicle and extremely close to a door functions of the key fob left in the Proceed as follows: and window, however, always start the vehicle are temporarily suspended to 1. Push the mechanical release button engine from the driver's seat. prevent unlawful use of the vehicle. and remove the emergency key. If the vehicle is started and the key fob To restore the functions, push the is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not unlock button on the functions- restart after it is shut off and the ignition suspended key fob left in the vehicle. is placed in the OFF position. Key Fob Battery The trunk is out of the assured Replacement operational range, however, if the key fob is operable the engine will start. If the buttons on the key fob are Key Fob Antenna Location inoperable and the indicator light does not flash, the battery power level may be low or discharged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Replace with a new battery (CR2025 type) before the key fob 07031301-361-002 Emergency Key Removed becomes unusable. The following conditions indicate that the battery power is low: 1 — Key Fob Case With Mechanical Release Button Indicator light (green) flashes in 2 — Emergency Key the instrument cluster for about 30 seconds after the engine is placed in 2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw

04010202-12R-001 the OFF position. driver, or the tip of your emergency key into the now exposed slot and carefully Key Fob Antenna Location The system does not operate and pry in the direction of the arrows to the operation indicator light on the key 1 — Interior Antenna open the cover (3) slightly. 2 — Operational Range fob does not flash when the buttons are pushed. 16 rubber ring shown in call-out (6) to be scratched or damaged. If the rubber ring comes out, reinstall it before inserting a new battery. Engine Start Function When Key Fob Battery Is Discharged When starting the engine by holding the key fob over the keyless ignition START/STOP button due to a 07031301-362-002 07031301-364-003 discharged key fob battery or a Pry Case Left Side Remove Back Cover For Battery malfunctioning key fob, be careful not Replacement 3. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw to allow the following, otherwise the driver, or the tip of your emergency key 3 — Key Fob Case signal from the key fob will not be into the side gap and carefully pry in the 5 — Key Fob Battery received correctly and the engine may direction of the arrow to open the cover not start: (4). 5. Insert a new battery with the positive pole facing up. Then, cover the battery Metal parts of other key fobs or with the battery cap. metal objects touch the key fob. Spare key fobs or key fobs for other 6. Close the cover and reinsert the vehicles equipped with an immobilizer Emergency Key. system touch or come near the key . Devices for electronic purchases, or security passage touch or come near the key fob.

07031301-363-002 Pry Case Right Side 4. Separate the key fob case, then remove the battery. 07031301-367-001 Install New Battery Note: Be careful not to allow the 17 2. Manual Transmission: continue to The engine cannot be started unless depress the clutch pedal firmly until the the clutch pedal is fully depressed engine has completely started. (manual transmission) or the brake pedal is fully depressed (automatic 3. Verify that the keyless ignition start transmission). indication light (green) flashes. If there is a malfunction with the keyless 4. Touch the keyless ignition ignition START/STOP button function, START/STOP button using the the keyless ignition start indicator light backside of the key fob while the (amber) flashes. In this case, the engine keyless ignition start indicator light may start, however contact an (green) flashes. authorized dealer as soon as possible. 05010201-KY1-001AB No Keys Touching The Key Fob 5. Verify that the keyless ignition start If the keyless ignition start indicator light indicator light (green) turns on. (green) does not illuminate, perform the operation from the beginning again. If it 6. Push the keyless ignition does not illuminate contact an START/STOP button to start the authorized dealer. engine. To change the ignition position without starting the engine, perform the following operations after the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) turns on:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1. Release the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic transmission). 05010201-KY2-001AB No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob 2. Push the keyless ignition START/STOP button to change the If the engine cannot be started due to a ignition position. The ignition cycles in discharged key fob battery, the engine 05010201-L12-001AB the order of ACC, ON, and OFF each can be started using the following Discharged Key Fob Battery Start time the keyless ignition START/STOP procedure: Procedure button is pushed. 1. Continue to depress the brake pedal When touching the keyless ignition Note: To change the ignition position firmly until the engine has completely START/STOP button using the again, perform the operation from the started. backside of the key fob as shown in the illustration, touch the keyless ignition beginning. START/STOP button with the lock switch side of the key fob facing up. 18 Emergency Operation For Starting The key fob is near electronic General Information The Engine devices such as personal computers. The following regulatory statement If the key warning light (red) illuminates, Non-FCA genuine electronic applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) or the keyless ignition start indicator equipment is installed in the vehicle. devices equipped in this vehicle: light (amber) flashes, this could indicate This device complies with Part 15 of the that the engine may not start using the There is equipment which discharges FCC Rules and with Industry Canada usual starting method. Contact an radio waves near the vehicle. license-exempt RSS standard(s). authorized dealer as soon as possible. The key fob may consume battery Operation is subject to the following If this occurs, the engine can be power excessively if it receives two conditions: force-started. push and hold the high-intensity radio waves. Do not place keyless ignition START/STOP button the key fob near electronic devices 1. This device may not cause harmful until the engine starts. such as televisions or personal interference. Other procedures necessary for starting computers. 2. This device must accept any the engine such as having the key fob To avoid damage to the key fob, DO interference received, including in the vehicle, and depressing the NOT: interference that may cause undesired clutch pedal (manual transmission) or operation. the brake pedal (automatic Drop the key fob. Note: Changes or modifications not transmission) are required. Get the key fob wet. expressly approved by the party Key Fob Cautions Disassemble the key fob unless responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the Because the key fob uses low-intensity replacing battery. equipment. radio waves, it may not function Expose the key fob to high correctly under the following conditions: temperatures on places such as the The key fob is carried with instrument panel or engine communication devices such as cellular compartment, under direct sunlight. phones. Expose the key fob to any kind of The key fob contacts or is covered magnetic field. by a metal object. Place heavy objects on the key fob. Put the key fob in an ultrasonic cleaner. Put any magnetized objects close to the key fob.

19 IGNITION SWITCH Do not leave the ignition in the ON Some indicator lights/warning lights position while the engine is not should be inspected before the engine Push Button Start running, doing so could result in the is started. Positions battery being discharged. If the ignition When the keyless ignition has been The system operates only when the key is left in ACC position (for automatic placed in the ON position, the sound of fob is within operational range. transmission, the gear selector is in the the fuel pump motor operating near the Each time the keyless ignition P position, and the ignition is in ACC), fuel tank can be heard. This does not START/STOP button is pushed, the the ignition cycles to the OFF position indicate an abnormality. ignition cycles in the order of OFF, ACC, automatically after about 25 minutes. and ON. Pushing the START/STOP OFF button again from ON position cycles The power supply to electrical devices Warning! the ignition to the OFF position. turns off and the keyless ignition start indicator light (amber) also turns off. In the OFF position, the steering wheel is Never use the PARK position as a locked. substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting ACC (Accessory) the vehicle to guard against vehicle Some electrical accessories will operate movement and possible injury or damage. and the indicator light (amber) When leaving the vehicle, always make illuminates. In the ACC position, the sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, steering wheel is unlocked. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and The Keyless Entry System does not lock your vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE function while the keyless ignition has Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or 05010101-L12-001AB been placed in the ACC position, and with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Keyless START/STOP Ignition the doors will not lock/unlock even if children to be in a vehicle unattended is Button they have been locked manually. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or ON others could be seriously or fatally injured. Note: Children should be warned not to touch the This is the normal running position after parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission The engine starts by pushing the the engine is started. keyless ignition START/STOP button gear selector. Note: The indicator light (amber) turns while depressing the clutch pedal Do not leave the key fob in or near the off (the indicator light amber illuminates (manual transmission) or the brake vehicle, (or in a location accessible to when the ignition has been placed in pedal (automatic transmission). To children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON position and the engine is not change the ignition position, push the the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could running). keyless ignition START/STOP button operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. without depressing the clutch or brake pedal. 20 Be sure the parking brake is fully ADVANCED Key Fob Left-In-Trunk Warning Beep disengaged before driving; failure to do so KEYLESS ENTRY Key Fob Left-In-Vehicle Warning can lead to brake failure and a collision. SYSTEM — IF Beep Always fully apply the parking brake EQUIPPED If you have a problem with the key fob, when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and or the key fob is lost or stolen, contact cause damage or injury. Also be certain to Advanced Keyless Entry System an authorized dealer as soon as leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to possible for a replacement and to make do so may allow the vehicle to roll and The Advanced Keyless Entry System is the lost or stolen key fob inoperative. cause damage or injury. an enhancement that allows you to Driving the vehicle with the parking brake lock/unlock the doors, trunk lid, fuel Note: Changes or modifications not engaged, or repeated use of the parking filler door, and opens the trunk lid with expressly approved by the party brake to slow the vehicle may cause the slow and careful push of a button. responsible for compliance could void serious damage to the brake system. The Advanced Keyless Entry System the user's authority to operate the allows the driver to START/STOP the equipment. ignition with the push of a button as The Advanced Keyless Entry long as the key fob is in the passenger System operational range may vary compartment. due to local weather conditions. If equipped, the vehicle security alarm The Advanced Keyless Entry system may be armed/disarmed with System is fully operational (door/trunk the push of the lock/unlock button lid/fuel filler door lock/unlock) when the located on the key fob. ignition is placed in the OFF position. System Malfunctions/Warnings The Advanced Keyless Entry System System malfunctions or warnings are does not operate if the ignition is indicated by the following warning lights placed to any position other than the or beeps (refer to “Getting To Know OFF position. Your Instrument Panel” for further information) : If the key fob does not operate when pushing a button, the operational Warning Light (Red) range becomes too small, or the Ignition Not Turned OFF Warning warning light does not illuminate or Beep flash, the battery may be weak or discharged. To install a new battery, Key Fob Removed From Vehicle refer to “Key Fob Battery Warning Beep Replacement.” Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep 21 Battery life is about one year. operational range while the key fob is Replace the battery with a new one if being carried. Warning! the Warning light (green) flashes in the instrument cluster. Replacing the battery about once a year is Radio waves from the key fob may affect recommended because the medical devices such as pacemakers: Warning light may not illuminate or before using the key fob near people who flash if the battery is low or discharged. use medical devices, ask the medical device manufacturer or your physician if Additional key fobs may be radio waves from the key fob will affect the obtained at an authorized dealer. Up to device. six key fobs may be used with the Advanced Keyless Entry System per Note: The Advanced Keyless Entry vehicle. Bring all key fobs to an System functions can be deactivated to 04010202-12S-002 authorized dealer when additional keys prevent any possible adverse effect on Advanced Keyless Entry Sensors are required. a user wearing a pacemaker or other 1 — Interior Antenna The Advanced Keyless Entry function medical device. If the system is 2 — Operational Range allows you to lock/unlock the door, deactivated, you will be unable to start trunk lid, and fuel filler door, or open the the engine by carrying the key fob. trunk lid while carrying the key fob. Contact an authorized dealer for Note: When the battery power is low, details. If the Advanced Keyless Entry or in places where there are System has been deactivated, you can high-intensity radio waves or noise, the operational range may become

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE start the engine by following the procedure indicated when the key fob narrower or the system may not battery becomes discharged. operate. Operational Range The system operates only when the driver is in the vehicle or within

22 Locking/Unlocking The Doors And Opening The Trunk Lid General Information The Trunk Lid The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 04020202-12A-003 04020201-12A-003 Electronic Trunk Release 2. This device must accept any Request Switch Door Functions 1 — Exterior Antenna interference received, including 1 — Exterior Antenna 2 — Operational Range interference that may cause undesired 2 — Operational Range 3 — Distance (31 inches) operation. 3 — Distance (31 inches) Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void Note: The system may not operate if the user’s authority to operate the you are too close to the windows or door handles. equipment.

23 VEHICLE SECURITY Expose the key fob to high Operation ALARM SYSTEM — IF temperatures on places such as the The engine may not start and EQUIPPED instrument panel, hood, or under direct warning light may illuminate or flash sunlight. if the key fob is placed in an area where Modifications And Note: it is difficult for the system to detect the Add-On Equipment signal, such as on the instrument panel. FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizer Changes or modifications not Move the key fob to a location within and the vehicle security alarm system expressly approved by the party the signal range, cycle the ignition off, operation if the system has been responsible for compliance could void and then restart the engine. modified or if any add-on equipment the user's authority to operate the Note: Signals from a TV, radio station, has been installed. equipment. transceiver, or mobile telephone could Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle, If the engine does not start with the interfere with your immobilizer system. If do not modify the system or install any correct key fob, and the warning you are using the proper key fob and add-on equipment to the immobilizer light keeps illuminating or flashing, the the engine fails to start, check the and the vehicle security alarm system system may have a malfunction. warning light. or the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer. Arming Immobilizer System The key fobs carry a unique The system is armed when the ignition The immobilizer system allows the electronic code. For this reason, and to is cycled from the ON to OFF position. engine to start only with a key fob the assure your safety, obtaining a The warning light in the instrument system recognizes. replacement key fob can only be done cluster flashes every two seconds until through your authorized dealer, and will the system is disarmed. If someone attempts to start the engine GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE require some waiting time. with an unrecognized key fob, the Disarming engine will not start, thereby helping to Always keep a spare key fob in The system is disarmed when the prevent unlawful vehicle use. case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, ignition is placed in the ON position with If you have a problem with the contact an authorized dealer as soon the correct programmed key fob. The immobilizer system or the key fob, as possible. warning light illuminates for about three seconds and then turns off. If the contact an authorized dealer. If you lose a key fob, an authorized engine does not start with the correct To avoid damage to the key fob, do not: dealer will reset the electronic codes of key fob, and the warning light your remaining key fobs and Drop the key fob. remains illuminated or flashing, try the immobilizer system. Bring all the following: Get the key fob wet. remaining key fobs to an authorized dealer to reset. Starting the vehicle Make sure the key fob is within the Expose the key fob to any kind of with a key fob that has not been reset operational range for signal magnetic field. is not possible. transmission. 24 Cycle the ignition off, and then restart Siren/Horn Triggering Conditions Make sure the engine compartment, the engine. If the engine does not start The siren/horn sounds intermittently convertible top, the doors, and the after three or more tries, contact an and the hazard warning lights flash for trunk lid are closed. authorized dealer. about 30 seconds when the system is Push the lock button on the key fob Note: triggered by any one of the following: or lock the driver's door from the outside with the emergency key. The If the warning light flashes Unlocking a door with an inside door-lock knob. hazard warning lights will flash once. continuously while you are driving, do With The Advanced Keyless Entry not turn the engine OFF. Contact an Forcing open a door, the engine function: push a request switch. The authorized dealer and have it checked. compartment or the trunk lid. warning light in the instrument If the engine is shut off while the panel flashes twice per second for warning light is flashing, you will Opening the hood by operating the hood release handle. 20 seconds. After 20 seconds the not be able to restart it. system is fully armed. Placing the ignition in the ON position Because the electronic codes are The vehicle security alarm system can without starting the engine. reset when the immobilizer system is also be armed by activating the auto repaired, the keys are needed. Make With the intrusion sensor: the re-lock function with all the doors, the sure to bring all the key fobs to an intrusion sensor detects a movement in trunk lid and the engine compartment authorized dealer so that they can be the vehicle. closed. programmed. The system will be triggered again (up The system will disarm if one of the Vehicle Security Alarm to ten times) if one of the above following operations takes place within System — If Equipped conditions remains. 20 seconds after pushing the lock The trunk lid will not open when the button: To rearm the system, perform If the vehicle security alarm system vehicle security alarm system is the arming procedure again. detects an inappropriate entry into the activated. vehicle or the intrusion sensor detects 1. Unlocking any door. movement in the vehicle which could If the battery becomes drained while 2. Opening any door. result in the vehicle or its contents the vehicle security alarm system is being stolen, the alarm alerts the armed, the siren will activate and the 3. Opening the engine compartment. surrounding area of an abnormality by hazard warning lights will flash during sounding the siren/horn and flashing the battery charging or replacement 4. Placing the ignition in the ON the hazard warning lights. process. position. The system will not function unless it's How To Arm The System The hazard warning lights will flash once to indicate that the vehicle properly armed. So when you leave the Close the windows and the security alarm system is armed when vehicle, follow the arming procedure convertible top securely. correctly. the doors are locked by pushing the Place the ignition in the OFF position. lock button on the key fob, or using the emergency key. 25 Note: Note: When the doors are unlocked by DOORS pushing the unlock button on the key If any door or trunk lid remains fob while the vehicle security alarm Lock/Unlock With closed for 30 seconds, the doors, and system is turned off, the hazard Emergency Key trunk lid automatically re-lock and the warning lights will flash twice to indicate vehicle security alarm system arms Both doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock that the system is turned off. even if a window open or the automatically when the driver's door is convertible top is left down. To Stop The Alarm locked using the emergency key. A triggered alarm can be turned off Lock With Emergency Key — Insert To reactivate the intrusion sensor, using any one of the following methods: turn off the armed vehicle security key into driver’s door and turn to the left alarm system and then rearm it. Pushing the unlock button on the key (toward front of car). fob The intrusion sensor is operational Unlock With Emergency Key — when the vehicle security alarm system Starting the engine with the keyless Insert key into driver’s door and turn to is armed. To cancel the intrusion ignition START/STOP button the right (toward back of car). They both unlock when the driver's sensor, push the intrusion sensor With The Advanced Keyless Entry cancel button each time the vehicle door is unlocked using the emergency function: pushing a request switch on key. security alarm system is armed. the exterior door handles or the electric To Turn Off An Armed System trunk release while the key fob is being Turn the emergency key toward the An armed system can be turned off carried. front to lock, toward the back to unlock. using any one of the following methods: The hazard warning lights will flash Pushing the unlock button on the key twice. Caution! GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE fob. Starting the engine with the keyless An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for ignition START/STOP button. thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the With The Advanced Keyless Entry vehicle unattended. function: pushing a request switch on the exterior door handles.

26 Manual Lock/Unlock Note: When locking the door this way, Central Lock/Unlock Knob be careful not to leave the key fob Both doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock inside the vehicle. The driver's door Operation From Inside automatically when the lock rocker lock knob cannot be used while the switch is pushed with both doors To lock any door from the inside, push driver's door is open. the door-lock knob. To unlock, pull it closed. outward. This does not operate the Note: other door locks. Warning! The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door cannot be locked while any other door is open. For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors The key fob may not be able to be before you drive as well as when you park detected by the vehicle keyless-go and leave the vehicle. system if it is located next to a mobile When leaving the vehicle, always remove phone, laptop or other electronic the key fob from the vehicle and lock your device; these devices may block the vehicle. If equipped with Advanced Keyless key fob’s wireless signal and prevent Entry, always make sure the keyless ignition the keyless-go system from starting is in “OFF” position, remove the key fob the vehicle. 04030107-L21-001AB from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Inside Door-Lock Knob Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or 1 — Door Knob Lock Position (Red death. Indicator Not Seen When Locked) 2 — Door Knob Unlock Position (Red Never leave children alone in a vehicle, Indicator Seen When Unlocked) or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of Note: The red indication can be seen reasons. A child or others could be when the door-lock knob is unlocked. seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, Operation From Outside brake pedal or the gear selector. To lock the passenger door with the 04030105-12D-002 Do not leave the key fob in or near the Central/Power Door Lock Switch door-lock knob from the outside, push vehicle, or in a location accessible to the door-lock knob to the lock position children, and do not leave the ignition of a Both unlock when the unlock rocker and close the door (holding the door vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless switch is pushed. handle in the open position is not Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN positions. A Note: The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel required). child could operate power windows, other filler door cannot be locked while any controls, or move the vehicle. other door is open. 27 Double Locking System Lock/Unlock With — If Equipped Advanced Keyless Entry Function — If Equipped The double locking system is designed to prevent someone who has broken Both doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler into your vehicle from opening the door door can be locked/unlocked by from the inside. If you have any pushing the request switch on the problems with the double locking exterior door handle while the key fob is system, contact an authorized dealer. being carried. System Activation Proceed as follows: 04030102-12A-001 1. Close both the windows and the Emergency Key Lock Procedure convertible top. The system can be activated by 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position pushing the lock button on the key fob and take the key fob with you. twice within three seconds. With The Advanced Keyless 3. Close both doors and trunk lid. Function: the system can be activated 4. Insert the emergency key in the by pushing the request switch on the driver's door, turn the emergency key to exterior door handle twice within three 04000098-121-555 the lock position (counter seconds. Request Switch On Exterior Door clockwise/left), and return it to the Note: The system cannot be activated Handle GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE center position. Then turn it to the lock when any door is open. To Lock position (counter clockwise/left) again System Deactivation within three seconds. To lock the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel Unlock the driver's door or place the filler door, push the request switch on 5. The indicator light illuminates for ignition in the ON position. If the power the exterior door handle and the hazard about three seconds to indicate that the supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the warning lights will flash once. system has been activated. battery is disconnected), the system A beep sound will be heard once. can only be deactivated by unlocking a door with the emergency key.

28 To Unlock Thekeyfobmaynotbeabletobe 4. The setting change is completed by Driver's door request switch located on detected by the vehicle keyless-go doing any one of the following: system if it is located next to a mobile the exterior door handle. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON phone, laptop or other electronic To unlock the doors, trunk lid, and the position. fuel filler door, push the request switch device; these devices may block the on the exterior door handle and the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent Closing the driver's door. the keyless-go system from starting hazard warning lights will flash twice. Opening the trunk lid. the vehicle. To unlock both doors and the fuel filler A beep sound is heard for confirmation Not operating the key fob for ten door, push the request switch on the seconds. exterior door handle again within three when the doors, and fuel filler door are seconds and two more beep sounds locked/unlocked using the request Pushing any button except the lock will be heard. switch on the exterior door handle. If button on the key fob. you prefer, the beep sound can be Front Passenger Door Request turned off. Pushing a request switch on the Switch: The volume of the beep sound can also exterior door handle. To unlock both doors and the fuel filler be changed. Use the following With Vehicle Security Alarm System door, push the request switch on the procedure to change the setting: The hazard warning lights flash when exterior door handle. A beep sound will the vehicle security alarm system is be heard twice and the hazard warning 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position armed or disarmed (refer to “Vehicle lights will flash twice. and close both of the doors and the Security Alarm System” found in trunk lid. Note: “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for 2. Open the driver's door. further information). Confirm that both doors, and the The setting can be changed so that the fuel filler door are securely locked. 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the doors and the fuel filler door are locked For the trunk lid, move it without driver's door, push and hold the lock automatically without pushing the pushing the electric trunk lid opener to button on the key fob for five seconds request switch on the exterior door verify that the trunk lid has not been or longer. The doors, and fuel filler door handle, (refer to “Personalization left open. will lock, an audible beep will activate at Features” section in “Getting To Know the currently set volume (if the beep Your Instrument Panel” for further Both doors and the fuel filler door sound is currently set to not activate, it information). cannot be locked when any door is will not activate). The setting changes open. each time the lock button on the key It may require a few seconds for the fob is pushed and the beep sound doors to unlock after the request activates at the set volume (if the beep switch on the exterior door handle is sound has been set to not activate, it pushed. will not activate). 29 Auto-Lock Function Auto Re-Lock Function Locking/Unlocking With Door-Lock A beep sound is heard when both After unlocking with the request switch Switch doors are closed while the key is being on the exterior door handle, both doors, Both doors and the fuel filler door lock carried. Both doors, the trunk lid, and and the fuel filler door will automatically automatically when the lock side is fuel door are locked automatically after lock if any of the following operations pushed. They unlock when the unlock about three seconds when the are not performed within about side is pushed. Advanced Keyless Entry key fob is out 60 seconds. To lock both the doors and the fuel filler of the operational range. If your vehicle has a vehicle security door from an open door, push the lock The hazard warning lights will flash alarm system, the hazard warning lights side of the door lock switch and then once (even if the driver is in the will flash for confirmation. close the door. operational range, both doors, trunk lid, The time required for the doors to lock Note: When locking the doors this and the fuel filler door are locked automatically can be changed (refer to way, be careful not to leave the key fob automatically after about 30 seconds). “Personalization Features” in “Getting inside the vehicle. If you are out of the operational range To Know Your Instrument Panel” for before the doors and the trunk lid are further information). completely closed or another key fob is Opening a door or the trunk lid. left in the vehicle, the auto-lock function will not work. Placing the ignition in any position Always make sure that both doors and other than the OFF position. the trunk lid are closed and locked Locking/Unlocking With A Key Fob before leaving the vehicle. The Both doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler auto-lock function does not close the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE door can be locked/unlocked by power windows. operating the keyless entry system key fob: refer to “Keyless Entry System” in “Keys” for further information.

30 Auto Lock/Unlock Function — If Equipped When the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), both doors, and fuel filler door lock automatically. When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, both doors, and fuel filler door unlock automatically. These functions can also be disabled so that they do not operate. Auto Lock/Unlock Function Setting Change Using Door-Lock Switch (With Door-Lock Switch) The doors, and fuel filler door can be set to lock or unlock automatically by selecting any one of the functions from the following table and using the door-lock switch on the interior door panel. There are only a total of six auto lock/unlock settings available for automatic transmission vehicles, and three for manual transmission vehicles. Be sure to push the unlock side of the driver's door-lock switch the correct number of times according to the selected function number. If the switch is mistakenly pushed seven times on an automatic transmission vehicle or four times on a manual transmission, the procedure will be cancelled. If this occurs, start the procedure from the beginning.

Function Number Function (*) 1 The auto door-lock function is disabled. Both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 2 (20 km/h) or more. Both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 3 (20 km/h) or more. Both the doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door unlock when the ignition is cycled from the ON to OFF position. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position and the 4 gear selector is shifted from park (P) to any other gear position, both the doors, and fuel filler door lock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position and the gear selector is shifted from PARK (P) to any other gear position, both the doors, and the fuel filler 5 door lock automatically. When the dear selector is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, both the doors, and the fuel filler door unlock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: both the doors, and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH (20 km/h) or more. When the gear selector 6 is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, both the doors, and the fuel filler door unlock automatically. (*) For other settings for the auto door lock function contact an authorized dealer. Note: Function number 3 is the factory setting for your vehicle. 31 Settings Changing The procedure can be cancelled by malfunctioning, the doors, trunk lid, Settings can be changed using the pushing the lock side of the door-lock and the fuel filler door will not unlock. switch. following procedure: When opening a door, the power 1. Safely park the vehicle. Both doors Note: windows open a little automatically. must remain closed. When closing the door, the power The vehicle lock-out prevention windows close automatically. This is a 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. feature prevents you from locking function for improving the sealing of yourself out of the vehicle. Both doors, the window, and it does not mean 3. Push and hold the lock side of the trunk lid, and the fuel filler door will there is a problem. If the vehicle battery driver's door-lock switch within automatically unlock if they are locked is disconnected for vehicle 20 seconds of placing the ignition in the using the power door locks with any maintenance or other reasons, the ON position, and make sure a beep door open. If both the doors are closed power windows will not open or close sound is heard about eight seconds even though the trunk lid is open, both automatically. If the power windows do afterwards. the doors and the fuel filler door will not open or close, the automatic lock. 4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock open/close mechanism for the function setting table, determine the Door Unlock (Control) System windows must be reset. function number for the desired setting. With Collision Detection — If Push the unlock side of the driver's Equipped: this system automatically door-lock switch the same number of unlocks the doors, trunk lid, and the times as the selected function number fuel filler door in the event the vehicle is (example: if you select function 2, push involved in an accident to allow the unlock side of the switch only two passengers to get out of the vehicle GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE times). immediately and prevent being trapped inside. While the ignition is placed in 5. Three seconds after the function the ON position and in the event the setting has been changed, a beep vehicle receives an impact strong sound will beep in the amount of the enough to inflate the air bags, both the selected function number (example: doors, the trunk lid, and fuel filler door Function number 3 = three beep are automatically unlocked after about sounds). six seconds have elapsed from the Automatic Transmission Vehicles time of the accident. The doors, trunk The doors cannot be locked or lid, and the fuel filler door may not unlocked while the setting function is unlock depending on how an impact is being performed. applied, the force of the impact, and other conditions of the accident. If door-related systems or the battery is 32 SEATS lever returns to its original position and for Low. Pushing the switch a fourth the seatback is locked in place by time will turn the heated seat off. Manual Adjustment attempting to push it forward and Note: Forward / Rearward rearward. To move the seat forward or rearward, If the ignition is switched OFF while pull the adjustment bar. Release the bar the seat warmer is operating (High, once the desired position is reached. Warning! Mid or Low), and then switched ON Using body pressure, move forward again, the seat warmer will and rearward on the seat to be sure automatically operate at the that the seat adjusters have latched. Adjusting a seat while driving may be temperature set before switching the dangerous. Moving a seat while driving ignition OFF. could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or Use the seat warmer when the death. engine is running. Leaving the seat Seats should be adjusted before warmer on for long periods with the fastening the seat belts and while the engine not running could discharge the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death battery. could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid Do not ride with the seatback reclined and Low. so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you Once a heat setting is selected, 03010202-12A-003AB Manual Seat Adjustment could slide under the seat belt, which could heat will be felt within two to five result in serious injury or death. minutes. 1 — Adjustment Bar 2 — Height Dial 3 — Recline Lever Heated Seats On some models, the front driver and Height passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and To adjust the height for front edge of seatbacks. The controls for the front the seat bottom, rotate the dial to the heated seats are located on the center desired position. instrument panel below the climate Seat Recline controls. To recline the seatback, lift up the The heated seats have three settings: recline lever and lean back until the High, Medium, and Low. Push the 03010203-L12-002 desired position has been reached, switch once to turn the heated seats on Heated Seat Switches then release the lever. Make sure the High, twice for Medium, and three times 33 NON-ADJUSTABLE Driver And Passenger Head Restraints Warning! HEAD RESTRAINTS The non-adjustable head restraints are Your vehicle is equipped with form fitted into the upper structure of non-adjustable head restraints on the Persons who are unable to feel pain to driver's and passenger's seatbacks. the skin because of advanced age, chronic the seatback, and are designed to illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, reduce the risk of injury by restricting The non-adjustable head restraints medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or head movement in the event of a rear consist of a trimmed foam covering other physical condition must exercise care impact. The seatback should be over the upper structure of the when using the seat heater. It may cause properly adjusted to an upright position seatbacks and are intended to help burns even at low temperatures, especially where the head restraint is positioned protect occupants from neck injury. if used for long periods of time. as close as possible to the back of the Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, Do not place anything on the seat or occupant’s head. on-road positions so that the head seatback that insulates against heat, such restraint is positioned as close as as a blanket or cushion. This may cause possible to the back of the occupant’s the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Warning! head. that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat Warning! will not provide the proper stability for Caution! passengers. An improperly latched seatback could cause serious injury. Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE will not provide the proper stability for Do not use organic solvents to clean the passengers. An improperly latched seat. It may damage the seat surface and seatback could cause serious injury. the heater.

34 STEERING WHEEL MIRRORS Steering Wheel Warning! Outside Mirrors Adjustment Be sure that all inside and outside To change the angle of the steering Do not adjust the steering column while mirrors are adjusted to the desired wheel: driving. Adjusting the steering column while position prior to driving the vehicle. driving or driving with the steering column Mirror Types: 1. With the gear selector in the PARK unlocked could cause the driver to lose position, pull the lock release lever, control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering Flat Type (Driver Side): flat surface located under the steering column, column is locked before driving your mirror. downward. vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Convex Type (Passenger Side): this 2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired mirror has a slight curve. position. Note: The passenger side convex 3. Push the lock release lever upward outside mirror will give a much wider to lock the steering column. view toward the rear of the vehicle, and especially of the adjacent lane. 4. Attempt to push the steering wheel The outside mirrors may be equipped upward and downward to ensure it is with a heated mirror system. Refer to locked before driving. “Climate Controls” for more information. The perceived distance of objects in the outer and inner regions of the wide angle mirror is different.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really 04050101-12A-001AB are. Relying too much on your passenger Manual Tilt Adjustment side mirror could cause you to collide with 1 — Lock Release Lever another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror. 35 Inside Day / Night Mirror

Rear View Mirror Adjustment Before driving, adjust the rear view mirror to center on the view through the rear window.

04060102-MAN-002AB 04060102-36E-666 Mirror Adjustment Lever Automatic Dimming Mirror Buttons 1 — Mirror Adjustment Lever 1—Off A — Day Driving Position 2—On B — Reduced Glare Position 3 — Light Sensor

04060102-ADJ-001 Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped Manual Mirror Adjustment Caution! Note: Before adjusting the manual The automatic dimming mirror mirror, place the mirror in the “day automatically reduces glare of To avoid damage to the mirror during

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE driving position” (see below). headlights from vehicles at the rear when the ignition is switched ON. cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution Reducing Glare From Headlights directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror 1. Push the lever forward for day automatic dimming function. The clean. driving (A position). indicator light will turn off. 2. Pull the lever rearward to reduce Push the off button ( O )tocancelthe glare of headlights from vehicles at the automatic dimming function. The rear (B position). indicator light will turn off. To reactivate the automatic dimming function, push the on button ( I ). The indicator light will illuminate.

36 Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors The ignition must be in the ACC or ON Manually fold the outside mirror position to adjust the outside power rearward until it is flush with the vehicle. mirrors. Rotate the mirror switch to the left(L) orright(R)toselect which mirror to adjust. Push the mirror control switch in the direction of the desired position.

04060102-121-666 Light/Rain Sensor 2 — Light Sensor

04060101-12R-001AB Note: Outside Folding Mirror Do not use glass cleaner or Your vehicle may be equipped with a suspend objects on or around the light driver side automatic-dimming mirror. sensor. Otherwise, light sensor The automatic-dimming door mirror is sensitivity will be affected and may not linked with the automatic-dimming operate normally. 04060101-L12-001 rearview mirror inside the vehicle to Power Mirror Switch automatically reduce headlight glare The automatic dimming function is 0 — Center Position from vehicles at the rear. Refer to canceled when the ignition is switched 1 — Left Position “Automatic Dimming Mirror” in this ON and the gear selector is in 2 — Right Position section for further information. REVERSE. Note: The passenger door mirror does After adjusting the mirror, lock the not have the automatic-dimming control by rotating the switch to the feature. center position to prevent accidental movements.

37 EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlights Rotate the headlight switch to activate/deactivate the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination. When the lights are turned on, the indicator in the instrument cluster illuminates.

05030101-132-001AB

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Headlight Switch 1 — Headlight Switch 2 — Fog Light Switch

Note: To prevent discharge of the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is OFF.

38 Headlight Operation Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF Daytime Running Lights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate Lights / Off Off On On On On (*) Instrument Panel Illumination (*) If the driver's door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off. With Auto-Light Control

Daytime Running Switch Position OFF AUTO High Beams Lights

ACC Or ACC Or ACC Or ACC Or Ignition Position ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Headlights Off Off Auto (*) Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Auto (*) Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate On (**) / Off Off Auto On On On On (****) Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination Off (***) (*) The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor. (**) While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is switched to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off. (***) When the ignition is switched to a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is switched to AUTO. (****) If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

39 Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting turned off completely when the engine (DRL) is running. When the headlight switch is in the The daytime running lights turn on AUTO position and the ignition is Note: automatically when the vehicle starts switched ON, the light sensor will moving. detect the surrounding light levels and The headlights, other exterior lights automatically turns the headlights, other and dashboard lights may not turn off They turn off when the parking brake is immediately even if the surrounding engaged or the gear selector is shifted exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off. area becomes well-lit because the light to the PARK position (if equipped with sensor determines that it is night time if automatic transmission). Note: Do not shade the light sensor by the surrounding area is continuously Note: In some markets, the daytime placing a sticker or a label on the dark for several minutes such as inside running lights can be deactivated. Refer windshield. Otherwise the light sensor long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, to “Personalization Features” in “Getting will not operate correctly. or in indoor parking lots. In this case, To Know Your Instrument Panel” for the lights turn off if the light switch is further information. turned to the OFF position. High Beams When the headlight switch is in the The headlights can be switched AUTO position and the ignition is between high and low beams by switched to ACC or OFF, the pushing the headlight switch lever headlights, other exterior lights and forward for high beams, and pulling the dashboard illumination will turn off. lever rearward to return to low beams. The dashboard lights can be

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When the headlight high beams are on, adjusted by rotating the knob in the the high beam indicator is instrument cluster. The day/night mode 05030101-12A-003 illuminated in the instrument cluster. Light Sensor can be changed by rotating the knob until a beep sound is heard. Flash To Pass The light sensor also works as a rain The sensitivity of the automatic You can signal another vehicle with your sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep lightsmaybechangedbyan headlights by partially pulling the hands and scrapers clear of the authorized dealer. headlight lever toward the steering windshield when the wiper lever is in wheel. This will cause the high beam the AUTO position and the ignition is Follow Me Home headlights to turn on until the lever is switched ON, as fingers could be The Follow Me Home Light System released. pinched or the wipers and wiper blades turns on the headlights (low beams) for The high beam indicator in the damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are going to clean a period of time after the ignition is instrument cluster illuminates while the switched OFF. high beams are active. the windshield, be sure the wipers are 40 System Activation in AUTO position, the front fog lights will With the ignition switched to ACC or stay on. OFF, pull the headlight control lever Turn Signals rearward and the low beam headlights will turn on. The ignition must be in the ON position The headlights turn off after a period of to use the turn signals and lane change time after all doors are closed. assist. The time until the headlights turn off Move the signal lever down (for a left after all of the doors are closed can be turn) or up (for a right turn). The signal changed through the Connect system. will self-cancel after the turn is completed. The headlights turn off if the lever is 05030101-132-001AB pulled again while the headlights are on, Headlight Switch If the indicator light continues to flash or after three minutes of no further after a turn, manually return the lever to 1 — Headlight Switch its original position. action after the first pull of the lever. 2 — Fog Light Switch The turn signal indicators (green) Front Fog Lights in the instrument cluster flash The front fog light can be activated The fog light indicator in the according to the operation of the turn when the ignition is in the ON position instrument cluster illuminates while the signal lever to show which signal is and the headlights or parking lights are front fog lights are on. active. on. Deactivation Note: If an indicator light stays on Activation Perform one of the following operations without flashing or if it flashes Turn the headlight switch to the or to turn off the front fog lights: abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out. position. Rotate the fog light switch to the OFF Rotate the fog light switch to the position. Lane Change Assist position. Turn the headlight switch to the OFF Move the lever halfway toward the position. direction of the lane change (until the indicator flashes) and hold it there. It will Switch the ignition to a position other return to the off position when released. than ON. Three-Flash Turn Signal The fog light indicator in the instrument cluster goes off when the After releasing the turn signal lever, the front fog light is turned off. turn signal indicator flashes three times. With Auto-Light Control The operation can be cancelled by moving the lever in the direction When the fog light switch is in opposite to which it was operated. position and the headlight switch is 41 The three-flash turn signal function can The following lights turn on when the WINDSHIELD be turned on or off using the Leaving Home Light System is WIPERS / WASHER personalization function in the radio. operated: low beams/parking lights/tail lights/license plate lights. Windshield Wipers And Adaptive Front Lighting Washer System (AFS) — If Operation of the Leaving Home Light Equipped System can be turned on or off through The windshield wiper/washer lever is the Connect system. located on the right side of the steering This system directs the main headlight wheel. The ignition must be in the ON beams and adapts it to the driving When the lock button on the key fob position to use these features. conditions around bends and turns, is pushed, and the vehicle receives the continuously and automatically. signal, the headlights turn off. Windshield Wipers The system directs the headlight beam When the headlight switch is in a Activate the windshield wipers by to illuminate the road in the best way, position other than or ,the pushing the wiper lever up or down. taking into account the speed of the headlights turn off. With Intermittent Wiper vehicle, the bend or corner angle and Set the lever to the intermittent position the speed of steering. Headlamp Leveling System — If Equipped and choose the interval timing by The Adaptive Front Lighting System is rotating the center switch. automatically activated when the On some models, the angle of the Switch positions: vehicle is started. headlights will be automatically adjusted when turning on the headlights. or MIST: operation while Leaving Home Light pushing the lever upward System Adjusting The Headlight OFF: stop GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The Leaving Home Light System turns When Abroad the headlights on when the unlock Dipped headlights are adjusted for --- or INT: intermittent operation button on the key fob is pushed while driving in the country where the vehicle — or LO: low speed operation away from the vehicle. was originally purchased. Activation When travelling in countries with = or HI: high speed operation With the ignition switch in the OFF opposite driving direction, to avoid position, and the headlight switch is in flashing the drivers on the other side of the or position, the the road, you need to cover areas of headlights will illuminate when the the headlight. For this operation contact unlock button on the key fob is pushed, an authorized dealer. and the vehicle receives the signal. The headlights turn off after 30 seconds. 42 With Auto-Wiper Control When the wiper lever is in the AUTO Warning! position, the rain sensor will sense the amount of rainfall on the windshield and turns the wipers on or off automatically Keep hands and scrapers clear of the (off/intermittent/low speed/high speed). windshield when the wiper lever is in the Switch positions: AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the or MIST: operation while wipers and wiper blades damaged when pulling up lever the wipers activate automatically.

OFF: stop 05030101-122-001 Windshield Wiper Lever If you are going to clean the windshield, AUTO: auto control operation be sure the wipers are turned off. This is — or LO: low speed operation 1 — Rain Sensor Adjustment important when clearing ice and snow. Switching the auto-wiper lever from the = or HI: high speed operation Note: Do not shade the rain sensor by OFF to the AUTO position while driving Adjusting Rain Sensor Sensitivity placing a sticker or a label on the activates the windshield wipers once, The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor after which they operate according to adjusted by rotating the switch on the will not operate correctly. the rainfall amount. wiper lever. When the wiper lever is in the AUTO The auto-wiper control may not operate From the center position (normal), position and the ignition is switched when the rain sensor temperature is rotate the switch downward for higher ON, the wipers may move automatically about 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, or about sensitivity (+) (faster response) or rotate in the following cases: 185 °F (85 °C) or higher. it upward for less sensitivity (-) (slower If the windshield is coated with water response). If the windshield above the rain repellent, the rain sensor may not be sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. able to sense the amount of rainfall If the windshield is struck with a hand correctly and auto-wiper control may or other object from either outside or not operate properly. inside the vehicle.

43 If dirt or debris (such as ice or debris Because heavy ice and snow can jam containing salt water) adheres to the the wiper blades, the wiper motor is Warning! windshield above the rain sensor or if protected from motor breakdown, the windshield is iced, it could cause overheating and possible fire by a the wipers to move automatically. circuit breaker. This mechanism will Sudden loss of visibility through the However, if the wipers cannot remove automatically stop operation of the windshield could lead to a collision. You this ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wiper blades, but only for about five minutes. might not see other vehicles or other control will stop operation. In this case, If this happens, turn off the wiper switch obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the set the wiper lever to the low speed and park off the road and remove the windshield during freezing weather, warm snow and ice. After five minutes, turn the windshield with defroster before and position or high speed position for during windshield washer use. manual operation, or remove the ice, on the switch and the blades should dirt or debris by hand to restore the operate normally. If they do not resume auto-wiper operation. functioning, contact an authorized If the fluid level is normal and the If the auto-wiper lever is left in the dealer as soon as possible. Pull off to washer does not work, contact an AUTO position, the wipers could the side of the road to a safe location. authorized dealer. operate automatically from the effect of Wait until the weather clears before strong light sources, electromagnetic trying to drive with the wipers waves, or infrared light because the rain inoperative. sensor uses an optical sensor. Windshield Washer It is recommended that the auto-wiper Pull the wiper/washer lever rearward lever be switched to the OFF position and hold it to spray washer fluid onto other than when driving the vehicle

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the windshield. under rainy conditions. With the wiper lever in the OFF, The auto-wiper control functions can be intermittent, or AUTO position, the turned off. wipers will operate continuously until the lever is released. 04110109-115-001AB Windshield Washer Nozzles With Headlight Washers When the headlights are on, the headlight washers operate automatically once every fifth time the windshield washer operates.

44 CLIMATE CONTROL To keep the internal parts lubricated and the system running smoothly, run SYSTEM Caution! the air conditioner about 10 minutes at Operating Tips least once a month. The air conditioning system will only Have the air conditioner checked before The system uses a coolant that is operate with the engine running. the weather gets hot. A lack of compatible with the laws in force in the To prevent the battery from being refrigerant may make the air conditioner countries where the vehicle is sold, R134a or R1234yf (indicated on a specific plate in discharged while the engine is off, do less efficient. The refrigerant specifications are indicated on a label the engine compartment). The use of other not leave the Blower Control Knob on coolants affects the efficiency and condition for extended periods of time. (A or B depending on the market) of the system. Also the compressor To improve system efficiency, clear all attached to the inside of the engine coolants used must be compatible with the obstructions (leaves, snow and ice) compartment. Check the label before indicated coolant. from the hood and the air inlet in the refilling the refrigerant. If the wrong type grille. of refrigerant is used, it could result in a serious malfunction of the air Vent Operation Use the air conditioning system to conditioner. For details, contact your Adjusting The Vents defog the windows and dehumidify the authorized dealer. air. To adjust the direction of air flow, move the vent adjustment knob. Recirculation mode should be used when driving through tunnels, while in a Note: When using the air conditioner in traffic jam, or when you would like to humid conditions, fog may blow from quickly cool the interior. the vents. This is a result of humid air being suddenly cooled and does not Use the outside air position for indicate a system malfunction. ventilation or windshield defrosting. If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows to let warm air escape, and then run the air conditioning system. 06010100121001 Label Location

45 Center Vents (Driver) and Side Vents Center and side vents are located on the dashboard. Air vent open/close: the air vents can be fully opened and closed by using knob1(A=open/B=close). Air flow direction adjustment:use knob 1 to adjust the center vents to the desired position. 06010201-033-666 06010201-121-001AB Operating the Side Air Vents Central Air Vent 1 — Air Vent Knob A — Open Position B — Closed Position

Center Vents (Front Passenger) Center vents are located on the dashboard. Air vent open/close: use the Center

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Vent tab 1 to open/close the center 06010201-033-001 Side Air Vents vents(A=open/B=close).

Air flow direction adjustment: use the 06010201-121-777AB Center Vent tab 1 to adjust the center Operating The Central Air Vent vents to the desired position. 1 — Center Vent Tab A — Open Position B — Closed Position

46 Airflow Mode

06010202-121-002 Airflow Locations 1 — Fixed Upper Air Diffuser 2 — Adjustable Side Air Vents 3 — Adjustable Center Air Vent 4 — Floor Vents

47 Manual Climate Control System With MAX A/C function GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

06010300-122-002 Manual Climate Controls With MAX A/C 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

48 Controls flow from the floor vents is less than Note: that of the position. 1 – Temperature Control Knob Before opening the convertible top, This dial controls the interior 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button make sure the Rear Window Defrost temperature of the vehicle. The Rear Window Defrost Button clears Button is turned off. Otherwise, the Turn it clockwise for hotter fog and frost from the rear window. The heat generated from the defroster temperatures and counterclockwise for ignition must be on to use the defroster. could damage the convertible top and colder temperatures. Push the button to turn on the Rear the internal material. MAX A/C – If Equipped: When the Window Defroster. The Rear Window This defroster is not designed for Mode Selector Knob is set to or , Defroster operates for about melting snow. If there is an the Blower Control Knob is in a position 15 minutes and then turns off accumulation of snow on the rear other than 0, and the temperature automatically. The button LED will window, remove it before using the control knob is in the maximum cold illuminate when the defroster is defroster. position, the Recirculation Button will operating. activate and the A/C will turn on To turn off the Rear Window Defroster Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To automatically. If A/C is not desired, before the end of 15 minutes, push the turn on the mirror defroster, turn the press the A/C Button to turn it off. button again. ignition ON and push the Rear Window 2 – Blower Control Knob Defroster Button. The blower has seven speeds. Turn the 5 – Air Recirculation Button Caution! knob clockwise to increase blower Push the Air Recirculation Button to speed or counterclockwise to decrease select between outside air and blower speed. Failure to follow these cautions can cause recirculated air positions. 3 – Mode Selector Knob damage to the heating elements: Recirculated Air Position: (LED on) Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select Use care when washing the inside of the Outside air is shut off when this position rear window. Do not use abrasive window has been activated. Use this position the air flow mode. cleaners on the interior surface of the The mode selector dial can be set at window. Use a soft cloth and a mild when going through tunnels, driving in the intermediate positions (●) between washing solution, wiping parallel to the congested traffic (high engine exhaust each mode. heating elements. Labels can be peeled off areas), or when quick cooling of the vehicle is desired. Set the knob to an intermediate after soaking with warm water. position if you want to split the air flow Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, Outside Air Position: (LED off) between the two modes. or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Outside air is allowed to enter the cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or For example, when the Mode Selector surface of the window. windshield defrosting. Knob is at the intermediate position (●) Keep all objects a safe distance from the between the and positions, air window. 49 Note: Do not use the Outside Air 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, Note: Position in cold or rainy weather is turn on the air conditioner. If the air conditioner is used while dangerous as it will cause the windows If the windshield fogs up easily, set the driving up large hills or in heavy traffic, to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, Mode Selector Knob to the position. monitor the Engine Coolant which could lead to a serious accident. If cooler air is desired at face level, set Temperature Warning Light to see if it 6 – A/C Button the Mode Selector Knob to the is illuminated or flashing. The air Push the A/C Button to turn on the air position and adjust the Temperature conditioner may cause engine conditioner. Control Knob to maintain comfort. overheating in these situations. If the The LED on the switch will illuminate The floor vents will blow warmer air warning light is illuminated or flashing, when the Blower Control Knob is in any while the side air vents will blow cooler turn the air conditioning off position except the OFF position. air (except when the temperature immediately. control dial is set at the maximum hot Push the button again to turn off the air When maximum cooling is desired, or cold position). conditioner. set the Temperature Control Knob to Note: The air conditioner may not Cooling (With Air the extreme cold position, push the Air function when the outside temperature Conditioner) Recirculation Button to activate the approaches 32 °F (0 °C). recirculated air position, and then turn Proceed as follows: the fan control dial fully clockwise. Heating 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the If warmer air is desired at floor level, Proceed as follows: position. set the Mode Selector Knob to the 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob position, and adjust the to the cold position. Temperature Control Knob to maintain

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE position. comfort. 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the The floor vents will blow warmer air the outside air position. desired speed. while the side air vents will blow cooler 3. Set the Temperature Control Dial to 4. Turn on the air conditioner by air (except when the temperature the hot position. pushing the A/C Button. control dial is set at the maximum hot or cold position). 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the 5. After cooling begins, adjust the desired speed. Blower Control Knob and Temperature Control Knob as needed to maintain comfort.

50 Ventilation Dehumidifying (With Air Conditioner) Proceed as follows: Warning! Operate the air conditioner in cool or 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the cold weather to help defog the position. Set the temperature control to the hot or windshield and side windows. warm position when defogging (Front 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost Proceed as follows: the outside air position. position with the temperature control set to 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the the cold position is dangerous as it will 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob cause the outside of the windshield to fog desired position. to the desired position. up. Your vision will be hampered, which 2. Set the Air Recirculation Knob to the 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the could lead to a serious accident. outside air position. desired speed. Note: 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob Windshield Defrosting For maximum defrosting, turn on to the desired position. And Defogging the air conditioner, set the Temperature 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Proceed as follows: Control Knob to the extreme hot position, and turn the Blower Control desired speed. 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the Knob fully clockwise. Front Defrost position. 5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing the A/C Button. 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob to If warm air is desired from the floor the desired position. vents, set the Mode Selector Knob to Note: One of the functions of the air the position. conditioner is dehumidifying the air. To 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the use this function, the temperature does desired speed. If equipped with MAX A/C, the not have to be set to cold. Set the 4. If dehumidified heating is desired, Recirculation Button can be set to the Temperature Control Knob to the turn on the air conditioner. Recirculated Air position, when the desired position (hot or cold), and turn Blower Control Knob is ON, and the on the air conditioner to dehumidify the Mode Selector Knob is set to the Front cabin air. Defrost position.

51 Automatic Climate Control System

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 06010900-122-999 Automatic Climate Controls — Type A 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

52 06010900122 Automatic Climate Controls — Type B 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

53 Controls Note: 1 – Temperature Control Knob With the air flow mode set to the Caution! This knob controls internal temperature position, and the Temperature of the vehicle. Turn it clockwise for Control Knob is set to a medium temperature, the floor vents will blow Failure to follow these cautions can cause hotter temperatures and damage to the heating elements: counterclockwise for colder warmer air, and the center and side air vents will blow cooler air. Before opening the convertible top, temperatures. make sure the Rear Window Defrost Button 2 – Blower Control Knob When the Blower Control Knob is is turned OFF. Otherwise, the heat generated from the defroster could The fan has seven speeds. Turn the on, and the Mode Selector Knob is in the position, the air conditioner is damage the convertible top and the internal clockwise to increase blower speed or material. counterclockwise to decrease blower automatically turned on, and the Air speed/enter Auto mode. Recirculation Button is automatically Use care when washing the inside of the set to the outside air position for rear window. Do not use abrasive window AUTO Position: The blower speed is windshield defrosting. cleaners on the interior surface of the automatically controlled by the system window. Use a soft cloth and a mild based upon the set temperature. 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button washing solution, wiping parallel to the 0 Position: To turn off the system, set The Rear Window Defroster clears fog heating elements. Labels can be peeled off the dial to 0 position. and frost from the rear window. The after soaking with warm water. ignition must be switched ON to use 3 – Mode Selector Knob Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, the defroster. or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select Push the button to turn on the Rear surface of the window. the air flow mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Window Defroster. AUTO Position: The air flow Keep all objects a safe distance from the The Rear Window Defroster operates window. automatically adjusts based upon the for about 15 minutes, and then turns off selected temperature. automatically. Note: This defroster is not designed for The button LED will illuminate when the melting snow. If there is an defroster is operating. accumulation of snow on the rear To turn off the Rear Window Defroster window, remove it before using the before the end of 15 minutes, push the defroster. switch again. Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To turn on the mirror defroster, switch the ignition on and push the Rear Window Defroster Button.

54 5 – Air Recirculation Button Operation Of Automatic Windshield Defrosting Press the Air Recirculation Button to Air Conditioning And Defogging select between outside air and Proceed as follows: Set the mode selector knob to the recirculated air positions. position and turn the blower control Recirculated Air Position: (LED On) 1. Set the mode selector knob to the knob to the desired speed. AUTO position. Outside air is shut off when this position In this position, the outside air position has been activated. Use this position 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to is automatically selected, and when the when going through tunnels, driving in the outside air position (indicator light blower control knob is on, the air congested traffic (high engine exhaust turned off). conditioner automatically turns on. The areas), or when quick cooling of the air conditioner will directly dehumidify vehicle is desired. Note: If the recirculated air position is the air to the front windshield and side Outside Air Position: (LED Off) used for long periods in cold weather or windows. Air flow amount will be Outside air is allowed to enter the high humidity, the windshield may fog increased. up more easily. cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or Use the temperature control knob to windshield defrosting. 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the increase the air flow temperature and Note: Do not use the Recirculated Air AUTO position. defog the windshield more quickly. Position in cold or rainy weather. Using the Recirculated Air Position in cold or 4. Push the A/C button to operate the rainy weather is dangerous as it will air conditioning (indicator light on). Warning! cause the windows to fog up. Your 5. Set the Temperature Control Knob vision will be hampered, which could to the desired position. lead to a serious accident. Set the temperature control to the hot or 6. To turn off the system, set the warm position when defogging (Front Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost 6 – A/C Button blower control knob to the 0 position. Push the A/C Button to turn on the air position with the temperature control set to Setting the temperature to maximum the cold position is dangerous as it will conditioner. hot or cold will not provide the desired cause the outside of the windshield to fog The LED on the switch will illuminate temperature at a faster rate. up. Your vision will be hampered, which when the Blower Control Knob is in any When selecting heat, the system will could lead to a serious accident. position except the off position. restrict air flow until it has warmed to Push the button again to turn off the air prevent cold air from blowing out of the conditioner. vents. Note: The air conditioner may not For an optimal cabin temperature, set function when the outside temperature the temperature close to 77º. Adjust to approaches 32 °F(0°C). the desired temperature if necessary.

55 Sunlight/Temperature POWER WINDOWS Sensor Power Window Controls The air conditioning system measures inside and outside temperatures, and sunlight. The ignition must be placed in the ON position for the power windows to It then sets temperatures inside the operate. cabin accordingly. A power window may no longer open/close if you continue to push the switch after opening/closing the power

06010904-121-002AB window. Interior Sensor If the power window does not open/close, wait a moment and then 2 — Interior Temperature Sensor operate the switch again. Note: To prevent burning out the fuse Note: Do not obstruct either sensor. and damaging the power window Otherwise, the air-conditioning system system, do not open or close both will not operate properly. windows at once. 06010904333003 The passenger window can be Exterior Sensor operated with each door switch when 1 — Sunlight Sensor the power window lock switch on the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE driver's door is in the unlocked position. Passenger Control Switches The passenger window can also be operated using the master control switches on the driver's door.

56 Auto-Opening Power Windows 5. Pull up the switch to fully close the To fully open the window automatically window and continue holding the push the switch completely down. To switch for about two seconds after the stop the window partway pull or push window fully closed. the switch in the opposite direction and 6. Repeat steps four and five for the then release it. The power window passenger power window while seated cannot be fully closed while the door is in the passenger seat. open. Power Window System Initialization 7. Make sure that the power windows Procedure operate correctly using the door switches. 04070103-LN2-002 If the battery was disconnected during Power Window Switches vehicle maintenance, or for other After the system has been re-initialized, 1 — Driver's Window reasons (such as a switch continues to passenger window can be fully opened 2 — Passenger's Window be operated after the window is automatically using the master control open/closed), the window will not fully switches. If the automatic power open automatically. window operation does not operate Resetting of the automatic function can normally while the doors or convertible be performed using the master control top are opened/closed, reset it using switches or each passenger door the above procedures. switch. Engine-Off Power Window The power window auto function reset Operation procedure can be done on both door The power window can be operated for switches. The power window auto about 40 seconds after the ignition has function will only resume on the power been cycled from ON to the OFF window that has been reset: position with both doors closed. If any door is opened, the power window will 1. Close the doors and the convertible stop operating. top. 04070103-L12-001 For engine-off operation of the power Power Window Switch Function 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. window, the switch must be held up firmly throughout window closure 1 — Closing-Lightly Pull The Switch Up 3. Make sure that the power window because the auto-closing function will 2 — Opening-Lightly Hold The Switch lock switch located on the driver's door be inoperable. Down is not depressed. 4. Push the switch and fully open the window. 57 HOMELINK — IF Warning! EQUIPPED General Information Never leave children unattended in a The HomeLink system replaces up to vehicle, and do not let children play with three hand-held transmitters with a single power windows. Do not leave the key fob built-in component in the auto-dimming in or near the vehicle, or in a location mirror. Pushing the HomeLink button on accessible to children, and do not leave the the auto-dimming mirror activates garage ignition of a vehicle equipped with the Keyless Entry System in the ACC or doors, gates and other devices ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly 04070104-L12-001 surrounding your home. unattended children, can become Power Window Lockout Switch Note: HomeLink and HomeLink house entrapped by the windows while operating 1 — Locked Position icon are registered trademarks of the power window switches. Such Gentex Corporation. entrapment may result in serious injury or 2 — Unlocked Position death. Note: When the power window lock Warning! Power Window Lock switch is in the locked position, the light Switch on the passenger power window switch turns off. The light may be difficult to This feature prevents the passengers Vehicle exhaust contains carbon see depending on the surrounding monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run power window from operating. Keep brightness. your vehicle in the garage while

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE this switch in the locked position while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas children are in the vehicle. can cause serious injury or death. 1. Locked Position (Button Your motorized door or gate will open and Pushed): only the driver's power close while you are programming the universal window can be operated. transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of 2. Unlocked Position (Button Not the door or gate. Only use this transceiver Pushed): both power windows on with a garage door opener that has a “stop each door can be operated. and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. 58 Pre-Programming The transmitter buttons. Do not release programming is complete and your System the buttons until step four has been device should activate when the Note: It is recommended that a new completed. HomeLink button is pressed and battery be placed in the hand-held released. transmitter of the device being Note: To program the remaining two programmed to HomeLink for quicker HomeLink buttons, begin with step training and accurate transmission of one. the radio-frequency signal. 7. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for Proceed as follows: two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with 1. Verify that there is a remote control “Programming” steps (see below) to transmitter available for the device you complete the programming of a rolling would like to program. code equipped device (most commonly 2. Disconnect the power to the device. a garage door opener). 04060102-121-999 Programming The HomeLink Buttons 8. At the garage door opener receiver System (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate 1 — First HomeLink Button Note: When programming a garage the “learn” or “smart” button. This can 2 — Second HomeLink Button usually be found where the hanging door opener or a gate, disconnect the 3 — Third HomeLink Button power to these devices before antenna wire is attached to the programming. Continuous operation of motorhead unit. the devices could damage the motor. 4. After the HomeLink indicator light 9. Press and release the “learn” or changes from a slow to a rapidly “smart” button (the name and color of The HomeLink system provides three blinking light, release both the the button may vary by manufacturer). buttons which can be individually HomeLink and hand-held transmitter Note: Complete the programming selected and programmed using the buttons. transmitters for current, on-market within 30 seconds. 5. Connect power to the device being devices as follows: 10. Return to the vehicle and firmly programmed. 1. Disconnect power to the device press, hold for two seconds and 6. Firmly press and hold the being programmed. release the programmed HomeLink programmed HomeLink button for five button. Repeat the “ press/hold/ 2. Position the end of your handheld seconds, and then release it. Perform release” sequence a second time, and, transmitter one to three inches (2.5 - this operation two times to activate the depending on the brand of the garage 7.5 cm) away from the HomeLink door or gate. If the door or gate does door opener (or other rolling code button you wish to program while not activate, press and hold the equipped device), repeat this sequence keeping the indicator light in view. just-trained HomeLink button and a third time to complete the 3. Simultaneously press and hold both observe the indicator light. If the programming process. HomeLink the chosen HomeLink and hand-held indicator light stays on constantly, 59 should now activate your rolling code frequency signal has successfully been INTERNAL equipped device. accepted by HomeLink (the indicator EQUIPMENT Note: To program the remaining two light will flash slowly and then rapidly). Storage Compartments HomeLink buttons, begin with step 2. Proceed with the “Programming” one. steps to complete. Center Console For questions or comments, please Operating The System The center console is located between contact HomeLink at the driver’s and passenger’s seats. www.homelink.com or Push the programmed HomeLink 1-800-355-3515. button to operate a programmed device. Gate Operator/Canadian Warning! The code will continue being Programming transmitted for a maximum of Canadian radio-frequency laws require 20 seconds. Keep storage compartments closed when transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) driving. Driving with the storage Reprogramming The after several seconds of transmission - compartments open is dangerous. To System which may not be long enough for reduce the possibility of injury in an HomeLink to pick up the signal during To program a device to HomeLink using accident or a sudden stop, keep the programming. a HomeLink button previously trained, storage compartments closed when driving. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. follow these steps: gate operators are designed to 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink “time-out” in the same manner. button. DO NOT release the button; Caution! If you live in Canada or you are having 2. The indicator light will begin to flash GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE difficulties programming a gate operator after 20 seconds. Without releasing the by using the “Programming” HomeLink button, proceed with Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the procedures (regardless of where you “Programming The System” step one. storage compartments while parked under live), replace “Programming The the sun. A lighter could explode or the Erasing Programmed System” step three with the following: plastic material in eyeglasses could deform HomeLink Buttons and crack from high temperature. Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to To erase the existing programming from unplug the device during the “cycling” all three operating channels, push and process to prevent possible hold the two outside buttons 1 and overheating. 3 on the auto-dimming mirror until the 1. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink indicator light begins to flash HomeLink button while you press and after approximately 10 seconds. release - every two seconds (“cycle”) Verify that the programming has been your hand-held transmitter until the erased when you resell the vehicle. 60 Insert the emergency key in the lock To use the back trim storage and turn it clockwise to lock, counter compartment, slide the seat all the way clockwise to unlock. forward and fold the seat back forward, Note: When using the rear console then open the compartment. cup holders, remove any cups before When finished, close the compartment opening the seat side compartment. If and return the seat to its original the seat side compartment is opened position and secure it. with a cup present, the lid will hit the After returning the seat to its original cups and may cause the contents to position, make sure the seat is secured spill. by attempting to lightly move it forward

06040706-12A-001AB Back Trim Storage Compartment and rearward. Center Console Lid Small items can be stored in the back Seat Side Compartment trim storage compartment which is Caution! The seat side compartment is located located behind the seats. between the seats above the cupholders. Do not forcefully push objects into the rear storage compartment. Otherwise, the box could be damaged.

Sun Visors The sun visors are located at the sides of the interior rear view mirror. They can be adjusted forward toward the windshield, and sideways toward the side windows, to block sunlight.

06040717-121-001AB Seat Side Compartment 1 — Release Handle 2 — Key Hole

To open, push the release handle down to open the seat side compartment. 06040718-12A-002AB Back Trim Storage Compartment 61 06040200-12A-002AB 06040200-T12-003 Overhead Light Switch Trunk Light Location 1—On 1 — Trunk Light Switch 2 — Door 3—Off Note: To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the Light switch positions: trunk open for a long period when the On : Light is on at all times. engine is not running. Illuminated Entry System 06040100-L12-001AB Door : Light is on when any door is Sun Visor open. Light is on or off when the The overhead light turns on when any GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE illuminated entry system is on. of the following operations occurs with Vanity Mirrors the overhead light switch in the door To access the vanity mirror, fold the sun Off : Light is off at all times. position and the ignition switched OFF: visor down and lift the cover toward the Trunk Light seats. Turns on for about 30 seconds when The trunk light comes on when the lid is the driver's door is unlocked. Interior Lights open and turns off when closed. Turns on for about 15 seconds when Overhead Light a door is opened while a key fob is left The interior light is located in the in the vehicle and then the door is headliner in between the sun visors. closed. The interior light can be set to three Turns on for about five seconds different positions. when a door is opened from the outside with a key fob being carried and then the door is closed. 62 The overhead light turns on for about The ignition is switched to a position Do not use accessories that are not 15 seconds when the ignition is other than OFF. genuine FCA accessories or the switched OFF with the overhead light equivalent. A door is opened. switch in the door position. Close the cover when the accessory A door is unlocked. The overhead light turns off immediately socket is not in use to prevent foreign in the following cases: The operation of the illuminated entry objects and liquids from getting into the system can be changed through the The ignition is switched ON and both accessory socket. Connect system. doors are closed. Correctly insert the plug into the Accessory Socket The driver's door is locked. accessory socket. The accessory socket is located deep Battery Saver Do not insert the cigarette lighter into in the back of the footwell on the the accessory socket. If any door is left open with the passenger side. overhead light switch in the door Noise may occur on the audio position or the trunk lid is left open, the playback depending on the device overhead light or trunk light turns off connected to the accessory socket. after about 30 minutes to prevent discharge of the battery. Depending on the device connected to the accessory socket, the vehicle's To prevent discharge of the battery, if electrical system may be affected, the interior lights remain on (the interior which could cause the warning light to light switch is in the on position), they illuminate. Disconnect the connected will turn off automatically under the device and make sure that the problem following conditions: is resolved. If the problem is resolved, No operations are done for about disconnect the device from the socket 06040400-L12-002AB 30 minutes after the ignition is switched Accessory Socket and switch the ignition off. If the OFF. problem is not resolved, contact an Only use genuine FCA accessories or authorized dealer. The button on the key fob is the equivalent requiring no greater than Note: To prevent discharging of the pushed, or the request switch located 12V (120 W, 10A). on the exterior door handle is pushed to battery, do not use the socket for long The ignition must be placed in ACC or lock the doors (vehicles with the periods with the engine off or idling. ON. advanced keyless function) after the ignition is switched OFF. To prevent accessory socket damage or electrical failure, pay attention to the In addition, if the following operations following: are performed after turning the interior lights off, they will turn on again if: Do not use accessories that require more than 12V (120 W, 10A). 63 Warning! Warning!

To avoid serious injury or death: Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids Only devices designed for use in this while the vehicle is moving. Using a cup type of outlet should be inserted into any holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle 12 Volt outlet. is moving is dangerous. If the contents spill, you could be burned. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. 06040500-J12AEC1-001 Caution! Removing Cupholders If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Installing Cupholders Do not place plastic bottles without When installing a cupholder, insert it caps in the cup holders. Otherwise, the firmly into the installation hole and make Cupholders — If Equipped contents may spill while the vehicle is being sure that it is secured in place. Cupholders are available and can be driven. inserted in the center console on the Do not place excessive weight on the passenger side and the rear area of the cup holders such as by resting your hands center console. or elbows on them. Otherwise, the cup holders could be damaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE If a passenger is present, install the front cup holder to the rear console. Otherwise, a knee might hit it and cause the contents to spill.

Removing Cup Holders Use both hands when removing the cup holder.

06040500L21002 Cupholders 1 — Front Cup Holder 2 — Rear Cup Holder (If Equipped)

64 Windblocker This windblocker reduces rear wind coming into the cabin when driving with the convertible top down.

06040500-L25-002 Correct Cupholder Placement The rear cupholder is designed for use on the rear console and cannot be installed to the front side.

06040500-J12AEC2-001 Installing Cupholders The front cupholder can be removed and installed to the rear console.

06041000-12A-003AB Windblocker 06040500-L26-001 Incorrect Cupholder Placement

65 TRUNK LID Using The Remote Release Button Using The Electric Trunk Lid — If Equipped Opener Opening With the remote release button: a trunk lid can also be opened while the key Warning! fob is being carried. Push the electric trunk lid button and raise the trunk lid when the latch Before opening the trunk lid, remove any releases. snow and ice accumulation on it. Otherwise, the trunk lid could close under the weight of the snow and ice resulting in injury. Be careful when opening/closing the trunk lid during strong winds. If a strong 04030201-R12-001 gust blows against the trunk lid, it could Interior Trunk Lid Release Button close suddenly resulting in injury. The remote release button function can Fully open the trunk lid and make sure be disabled by locking the doors using that it stays open. If the trunk lid is only the key fob, emergency key, or a opened partially, it could slam shut by request switch on the exterior door vibration or wind gusts resulting in injury. handle to prevent an intruder in the 04030201-12A-001 When loading or unloading luggage in vehicle from opening the trunk lid. Electric Trunk Release Button the trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise, To enable the remote release button Without the remote release button: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE you could get burned by the heat of the operation, unlock the doors by using exhaust gas. unlock the doors and trunk lid, then the key fob, emergency key, request push the electric trunk lid opener and switch on the exterior door handle, or raise it when the latch releases. place the ignition in the ON position. Note: The remote release button cannot be disabled by locking the doors using the door-lock switch/door-lock knob.

66 With The Advanced Keyless Entry Proceed as follows: Function 1. Close the convertible top and A locked trunk lid can also be opened remove the windblocker. while the key fob is being carried. When opening the trunk lid with the doors locked, it may require a few seconds for the trunk lid latch to release after the electric trunk lid opener is pushed. The trunk lid can be closed when the doors are locked with the key fob left in the vehicle. However, to prevent locking 08080100-122-001 the key fob in the vehicle, the trunk lid Cover Removal can be opened by pushing the electric trunk lid opener. If the trunk lid cannot 4. Turn and loosen the cap screws until the screws start to spin free. be opened despite doing this 08080100-125-002 procedure, push the electric trunk lid Remove Windblocker Note: Do not pull the screw when opener to fully open the trunk lid after pulling the cap. Otherwise, the screw 2. Remove the fasteners on the right may fall off and become lost. pushing the trunk lid completely closed. side of the vehicle. If the vehicle battery is discharged or Refer to “Trunk Emergency Release” there is a malfunction in the electrical located in “Getting To Know Your system and the trunk lid cannot be Vehicle” for further information. unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened Closing by performing the emergency procedure. 1. Use both hands to push the trunk lid down until the lock snaps shut. Do not When Trunk Lid Cannot slam it. Be Opened 2. Pull up on the trunk lid to make sure If the battery is discharged, the trunk lid it is secure. cannot be unlocked and opened. In this case, the trunk can be unlocked by 08080100-121-004 taking care of the discharged battery Remove Fasteners situation. 3. Partially peel back the cover on the If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked even right side of the vehicle. if the discharged battery situation has been resolved, the electrical system may have a malfunction. 67 TRUNK EMERGENCY Trunk Safety Warning HOOD RELEASE Opening The Hood As a security measure, a trunk internal Warning! To open the hood, proceed as follows: emergency release lever is built into the rear tail panel. In the event of an adult 1. With the vehicle in PARK, pull the or child being locked inside the trunk, Do not allow children to have access to the release handle located to the left of the the trunk can be simply opened by trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from steering wheel, below the instrument pulling down the lever and open the outside, or through the inside of the panel. vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when trunk lid. After performing this your vehicle is unattended. Once in the emergency measure, contact an trunk, young children may not be able to authorized dealer as soon as possible. escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

07030201-L12-001 Releasing The Hood Latch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1 — Hood Release Handle 08080100-123-004 Trunk Emergency Release 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and insert your hand into the hood opening, then slide the latch lever to the right, and lift up the hood.

68 Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

07030201-122-001AB 07030201-123-002 Sliding The Latch Lever To The Inserting Support Rod Into Hole Caution! Right 4 — Support Rod Hole 2 — Latch Lever To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to Closing The Hood approximately 8 inches (20 cm) and drop 3. Pull up the support rod from the clip, To close the hood, proceed as follows: the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully and insert it into the support rod hole closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle indicated by the arrow to hold the hood 1. Check under the hood area to make unless hood is fully closed, with both open. certain all filler caps are in place and all latches engaged. loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers, etc.) have been removed. 2. Lift the hood with one hand, and with the other hand grasp the padded area on the support rod. 3. Secure the support rod into the rod clip. 4. Verify that the support rod is secured in the clip before closing the 07030201-130-888 hood. Support Rod Location 5. Lower the hood slowly to a height of 3 — Support Rod about 8 inches (20 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop. 69 CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) Lowering The Convertible Top

Warning!

Do not sit on the folded convertible top, otherwise the convertible top could be 04110102-L36-006 damaged or you may fall off and be injured. Lock Release Latch 1 — Release Latch Closed To lower the convertible top, Proceed 2 — Release Latch Open as follows: 1. Make sure the parking brake is 4. With the lock release latch pushed applied and the engine is OFF. forward (red indicator visible), pull the top latch handle rearward to unlock it. 2. Make sure there are no objects which have been placed in the area 04110102-L22-002 where the convertible top is to be Removing Striker From Anchor

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE retracted. 4 — Striker 3. Push forward on the release latch. 5 — Anchor There is a red indicator showing that the latch is open. Note: The power windows will go down automatically when the convertible top is opened. If the power windows do not go down automatically, 04110102-L21-001 fully open the windows using the power Pulling The Top Latch Handle window switch located on the doors. Rearward 3 — Latch Release Handle

5. Remove the striker from the anchor. 70 6. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold convertible top storage area or center the convertible top along the front edge console when the vehicle is moving is a and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. dangerous way to ride. During a sudden To lower the convertible top from inside maneuver or collision you could be the vehicle, use the convertible top seriously injured or even killed. handles. Raising The Convertible Top To raise the convertible top, proceed as follows: 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied and the engine is OFF. 2. Pull the unlock lever upward to disengage the lock.

04110102-123-002AB Convertible Top Handles 6 — Handles

04110102-126-001AB 7. Move the convertible top rearward Retracted Convertible Top and while pushing the rear glass lightly with your hand. Warning! 8. With the back end of the convertible top pushed down, push the front end 04110103-121-004 until a latching sound is heard. Lightly Always keep your hands and fingers Unlock Lever Location away from the fastening mechanisms when rock the retracted convertible top to 1 — Unlock Lever make sure it is securely locked. moving the convertible top: it is dangerous to place your hands or fingers near the fastening mechanisms. Your hands or fingers could be caught and injured by the mechanism. Sit in the seat with the seat belt correctly fastened when the vehicle is moving: standing in the vehicle, or sitting on the 71 3. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the convertible top along the front edge and pull it towards the vehicle front. To raise the convertible top from inside the vehicle, use the convertible top handles.

04110103-124-001 Lock Release Button 6 — Red Indicator 7 — Release Latch Locked 8 — Release Latch Unlocked

04110103-L23-002 Convertible Handle Location 2 — Convertible Top Handles Caution!

04110103-L24-003 4. While sitting in a seat, grasp the Convertible Top Components Driving with the convertible top not fully GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE locked could damage the convertible top. convertible top handles, and push the 4 — Closing Release Latch convertible top against the windshield. 5 — Striker Note: Make sure the striker engages with the 6 — Anchor anchor, move the top latch slowly, and Do not spray water directly near the then push the top latch upward until a seam of the window and convertible latching sound is heard. 5. If the red indicator is visible on the top when flushing away dirt on the soft lock release button, the convertible top top with water. Otherwise, water may is not locked. After locking the enter the vehicle (refer to “Convertible convertible top, verify that the red Top Maintenance” in “Servicing And indicator is not visible. Maintenance”).

72 The convertible top may be To help prevent theft or vandalism constricted if it is left retracted for a and to ensure that the passenger Caution! long period. Therefore, if the top has compartment stays dry, close the become constricted, it may be difficult convertible top securely and lock both to hook the top latch striker to the doors when leaving the vehicle. Before opening the convertible top, anchor. The soft top is made of high quality make sure the rear window defroster Make sure the convertible top is material and if it is not maintained switch is turned off. Otherwise the heat generated from the window defroster could securely locked by pushing up on it. If correctly, the material could harden, damage the convertible top and the internal it still sounds loose (rattles) after being becomes stained, or have an uneven material. locked by the top latch, contact an gloss. authorized dealer. Make sure nothing is on the convertible Lowering the convertible top while top or near the back window when raising it's wet can also cause water to drip or lowering the convertible top. Even small Convertible Top into the cabin. objects may interfere and cause damage. Precautions The power windows go down Do not drive through an automatic car Remove leaves or other debris that automatically in conjunction with the wash; it may damage the convertible top. may accumulate on and around the convertible top opening/closing. Do not raise or lower the convertible top convertible top. If leaves or other debris However, this is a function for improving when the temperature is below 41 °F (5 °C); block the drain filter, water may enter the operability, and it does not mean this will damage the convertible top material. the vehicle. Clean the drain filter at least there is a problem. If the vehicle battery once a year. is disconnected for vehicle maintenance Do not lower the convertible top when or other reasons, the power windows it's wet. If the convertible top dries while Before lowering or raising the folded, it will deteriorate and mold. will not go down automatically. If the convertible top, stop in a safe place off power windows do not go down, the Do not raise or lower the convertible top of the road and park on a level surface. automatic open/close mechanism for in a strong wind as it could damage the When lowering the convertible top, the windows must be reset. convertible top or cause an unexpected make sure objects inside the vehicle are accident. The windblocker reduces the amount not blown away by the wind. of wind coming into the cabin from Secure all loose objects inside before behind when driving with the driving with the convertible top down. convertible top opened. Before starting the vehicle make sure the convertible top is correctly locked.

73 ELECTRIC POWER ENVIRONMENT Do not push-start or pull-start your STEERING PROTECTION vehicle. Under U.S. federal law, any modification Power Steering SYSTEMS to the original-equipment emission Electric power steering is only operable Emission Control System control system before the first sale and when the engine is running. This vehicle is equipped with an registration of a vehicle is subject to If the engine is off or if the power emission control system (the catalytic penalties. In some states, such steering system is inoperable, you can converter is part of this system) that modification made on a used vehicle is still steer, but it requires more physical enables the vehicle to comply with also subject to penalties. effort. existing exhaust emissions While the engine is off, the sound of a requirements. If the steering feels stiffer than usual valve opening and closing can be heard during normal driving or the steering Ignoring the following precautions could at the rear of the vehicle, however this vibrates, contact your authorized dealer. cause lead to accumulate on the does not indicate an abnormality. The catalyst inside the converter or cause The warning light notifies the driver vehicle has a self-checking device and the converter to get very hot. Either it operates while the engine is off. of system abnormalities and operation condition will damage the converter and conditions. cause poor performance: Note: Never hold the steering wheel to Warning! the extreme left or right for more than USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL. five seconds with the engine running. Do not drive your vehicle with any This could damage the power steering sign of engine malfunction. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you system. park over materials that can burn. Such Do not coast with the ignition OFF. materials might be grass or leaves coming GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE into contact with your exhaust system. Do Do not descend steep grades in gear not park or operate your vehicle in areas with the ignition OFF. where your exhaust system can contact Do not operate the engine at high anything that can burn. idle for more than two minutes. Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by your authorized dealer.

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS...... 76 MAINTENANCE MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 81 FUEL ECONOMY MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 84 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 86 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES . .105 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBDII...... 109 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .110

75 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS Instrument Cluster

05020103-121-001AB Instrument Cluster

1 — Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination 2 — Tachometer 3 — Speedometer

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 — Automatic Transmission Info Display 5 — Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

76 Odometer/Trip Computer Odometer Trip Computer Reset The odometer records the total The trip computer will be erased when: distance the vehicle has been driven. The display mode can be changed from The power supply is interrupted odometer to “Trip computer A” to “Trip Trip Computer (blown fuse or the battery is computer B” and then back to The trip computer can record the total disconnected). odometer by pushing the selector while distance of two trips. One is recorded in one of them is displayed. “Trip A”, and the other is recorded in The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 miles. The selected mode will be displayed. “Trip B”. For instance, “Trip A” can record the Speedometer distance from the point of origin, and The speedometer indicates the speed “Trip B” can record the distance from of the vehicle. where the fuel tank is filled. When “Trip A” is selected, pushing the Instrument Panel selector again within one second will Illumination change to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A” When the position lights are turned on is selected, TRIP A will be displayed. with the ignition switched ON, the When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B will brightness of the instrument panel be displayed. illumination is dimmed. When the The trip computer records the total 05020102-121-001AB position lights are turned on, the Odometer/Trip Reset Button distance the vehicle is driven until the warning light in the instrument meter is again reset. Return it to “0.0” cluster turns on (see “Headlights” in 1 — Odometer/Trip Reset Button by depressing and holding the selector “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for one second or more. chapter). When the ignition is placed in the ACC Use this meter to measure trip Brightness Adjustment distances and to compute fuel or OFF position, the odometer or trip The brightness of the instrument panel consumption. cannot be displayed. Pushing the and dashboard illuminations can be selector can switch the trip or reset it If the fuel economy data is reset using adjusted by rotating the knob: for a ten-minute period in the following the fuel economy monitor or Trip “A” is cases: reset using the trip meter, the fuel The brightness decreases by rotating economy data and Trip “A” are reset the knob to the left. A beep sound will After the ignition is cycled to OFF be heard when the knob has been from ON. simultaneously when the fuel economy monitor with the trip meter is on. rotated to the maximum dim position. After the driver's door is opened. Note: Only the trip records tenths of miles (kilometers).

77 The brightness increases by rotating Trip Computer And Info the knob to the right. Switch The following information can be selected by pushing the INFO switch with the ignition in the ON position: Distance-to-empty (approximate distance you can travel on the available fuel). Average fuel economy. 0502011019A019 Current fuel economy. Distance To Empty Display Screen Average vehicle speed. 05020102-121-001AB Note: Dimmer Knob If you have any problems with your trip computer, contact an authorized dealer. Even though the distance-to-empty 1 — Instrument Cluster Illumination display may indicate a sufficient Dimmer Knob amount of remaining driving distance before refueling is required, refuel as soon as possible if the fuel level is very Cancelling Illumination Dimmer low or the low fuel warning light Rotate the knob to the right until a beep illuminates. is heard while the instrument cluster is dimmed with the ignition switched ON. The display may not change unless If the instrument cluster's visibility is you add more than approximately reduced due to glare from surrounding 2.3 gallons (9 liters) of fuel. brightness, cancel the illumination The distance-to-empty is the dimmer. 0620500-122-001 approximate remaining distance the When the illumination dimmer is Instrument Cluster Display Controls vehicle can be driven until all the canceled, the instrument cluster cannot Distance-To-Empty Mode graduation marks in the fuel gauge be dimmed even if the position lights (indicating the remaining fuel supply) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL are turned on. When the illumination This mode displays the approximate disappear. dimmer is canceled, the screen in the distance you can travel on the center display switches to constant remaining fuel based on the fuel display of the daytime screen. economy. The distance-to-empty will be calculated and displayed every second. 78 If there is no past fuel economy Current Fuel Economy Mode Average Vehicle Speed Mode information such as after first This mode displays the current fuel This mode displays the average vehicle purchasing your vehicle or the economy by calculating the amount of speed by calculating the distance and information is deleted when the battery fuel consumption and the distance the time traveled since connecting the cables are disconnected, the actual traveled. Current fuel economy will be battery or resetting the data. distance-to empty/range may differ calculated and displayed every two Average vehicle speed will be from the amount indicated. seconds. calculated and displayed every Average Fuel Economy Mode When you've slowed to about 3 MPH 10 seconds. To clear the data being This mode displays the average fuel (5 km/h) , “- - - mpg” (“- - - L/100 km”) displayed, push the INFO switch for economy by calculating the total fuel will be displayed. more than 1.5 seconds. consumption and the total traveled distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection, or resetting the data. The average fuel economy is calculated and displayed every minute. To clear the data being displayed, push the INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds. After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - mpg” (“---L/100km”)willbe displayed for about 1 minute before the 05020110199019 0502011020110C fuel economy is recalculated and Current Fuel Economy Display Average Vehicle Speed Display displayed. Screen Screen After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - MPH” (“---km/h”)willbedisplayed for about 1 minute before the vehicle speed is recalculated and displayed.

79 Tachometer Engine Coolant Park the vehicle in a safe place Temperature Gauge And immediately and take appropriate The tachometer shows engine speed in Fuel Gauge measures. If the vehicle continues to be thousands of revolutions per minute driven, it could cause damage to the (rpm). Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge engine. The range varies depending on the type Fuel Gauge of gauge. The fuel gauge 2 shows approximately how much fuel is remaining in the tank when the ignition is in the ON position. We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full. E = Empty F = Full If the low fuel warning light illuminates or the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as possible.

05020103-12A-002AB Note: Tachometer After refueling, it may require some 1 — Tachometer Display time for the indicator to stabilize. In addition, the indicator may deviate while driving on a slope or curve since the fuel moves in the tank.

0502010417A007 The display indicating a quarter or Fuel/Temperature Gauge less remaining fuel has more segments to show the remaining fuel level in 1 — Engine Coolant Temperature 2 — Fuel Gauge greater detail.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The direction of the arrow on the fuel gauge indicates that the fuel door Note: If the high engine coolant lid is on the left side of the vehicle. temperature warning light (red) turns on, there is a possibility of overheating.

80 Outside Temperature Changing The Temperature Unit Of MAINTENANCE Display The Outside Temperature Display MONITOR — IF When the ignition is in the ON position, The outside temperature unit can be EQUIPPED the outside temperature is displayed. switched between Fahrenheit and Celsius using the following procedure. Oil Life Reset Settings can be changed through the Proceed as follows: Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to 1. Select the icon on the home “Personalization Features” in this screen to display the “Applications” chapter. screen. Note: When the temperature unit indicated in the outside temperature 2. Select “Maintenance” to display the display is changed, the temperature maintenance list screen. unit indicated in the engine coolant 3. Switch the tab and select the setting gauge display changes in conjunction item you want to change: “Scheduled,” with it. 05020107345034 “Tire Rotation,” or “Oil Change.” Outside Temperature Screen Cruise Control Set Display Vehicle Speed Display Under the following conditions, the The vehicle speed preset using the outside temperature display may differ cruise control is displayed. from the actual outside temperature depending on the surroundings and vehicle conditions: Significantly cold or hot temperatures. Sudden changes in outside temperature. The vehicle is parked. The vehicle is driven at low speeds. 0502010819A019 Cruise Control Display Screen

81 Oil Life Monitor You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:

Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be turned on/off. Displays the time or distance until Time (months) maintenance is due. Select this item to set the maintenance period. “Scheduled Due!” is displayed in red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the Scheduled remaining distance is less than 300 mi Distance (mile or km) (500 km) or the remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the time and distance to the initial Reset values. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever carrying out maintenance. Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until tire rotation is due. Select this item to set the tire rotation distance. “Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red and the wrench indicator light will Tire Rotation illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating the tires. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

82 Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until an oil change is due. Select this item to set the oil change distance. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. Oil Change Displays the engine oil life until an oil change is due. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the indicator light will illuminate in the Oil life (%) instrument cluster when remaining oil life distance is less than 300 mi (500 km), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the remaining oil life to 100%. The Reset system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. (*) The engine oil flexible maintenance setting is available (only some models). Consult an authorized dealer for details. When the engine oil flexible maintenance setting is selected, you will see the following items in the display. The vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions and lets you know when an oil change is due by illuminating the indicator light in the instrument cluster.

83 FUEL ECONOMY 3. Operate the Multimedia Control MONITOR — IF Knob or touch the screen and display EQUIPPED the menu. Note: When the menu is displayed by Description touching the screen, the display is The “Fuel Consumption” information is hidden automatically after 6 seconds. displayed by operating each icon in the Select the icon in the menu and display. perform the operation. Each icon In addition, after completing a trip, the operates as follows: total energy efficiency to date is 1. Hides the menu display. displayed in the ending display when 05240100-36A-003 the ending display is turned on. 2. Displays the application screen. Fuel Economy Display Screen Proceed as follows: 3. Resets the fuel economy data. 1. Select the icon on the home 4. Displays the following setting screen to display the applications screen: ending display on/off switching screen. - On/off switching for function which 2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”. synchronizes reset fuel economy data to trip meter (Trip A). GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

84 Fuel Consumption Ending Screen Display Display If the ending display on the fuel Information regarding fuel economy is economy monitor is on when the displayed: ignition is cycled from ON position to the OFF position, the information 1. Displays the fuel economy for the regarding the fuel economy is past 60 minutes: displayed. Displays the fuel economy every minute for the past 1 to 10 minutes. Displays the fuel economy every 05240101-36A-004 10 minutes for the past 10 to Average Fuel Economy Display 60 minutes. Screen 2. Displays the average fuel economy Note: The fuel economy data can be over the past five resets and after the reset by doing the following operation: current reset. Push the reset switch from the 3. Calculates the average fuel menu screen. economy every minute after vehicle travel begins, and displays it. When the function, which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter, is on, reset Trip A of the trip meter. Delete the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip computer. After resetting the fuel economy data, “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel economy is calculated.

85 WARNING LIGHTS Proceed as follows: Seat Belt Warning Light AND MESSAGES 1. If the warning light is turned on, Door Ajar Warning Light Warning Lights And select icon on the home screen to Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Messages display the application screen. Light Note: 2. Select “ Warning Guidance”to Tire Pressure Monitoring System display the current warnings. The warning light in the instrument Warning Light panel appears together with a 3. Select the applicable warning to KEY Warning Light dedicated message and/or acoustic view the warning details. LED Headlight KEY Warning Light signal when applicable. These For the following warning/indicator indications are indicative and lights: BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFF precautionary and as such must not be Indicator Light considered as exhaustive and/or Master Warning Light TCS/DSC Indicator Light alternative to the information contained Brake System Warning Light in the Owner’s Manual, which you are DSC OFF Indicator Light advised to read carefully in all cases. ABS Warning Light Security Indicator Light Always refer to the information in this Charging System Warning Light chapter in the event of a failure Indicator Light indication. Engine Oil Warning Light Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Electric Throttle Warning Light Failure indications displayed are Warning Light divided into two categories: serious Cold Start Warning Light The light turns on when the ignition is and less serious failures. Serious Check Engine Warning Light switched on for an operation check, failures are indicated by a repeated and turns off a few seconds later or and prolonged warning "cycle". Less Coolant Temperature Warning Light when the engine is started. If the light serious failures are indicated by a does not turn on or remains turned on, warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. Automatic Transmission Warning Light have the vehicle inspected at an The display cycle of both categories authorized dealer. can be interrupted. The instrument Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Note: Only for “Brake System Warning panel warning light will stay on until the Light GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cause of the failure is eliminated. Light:” the light turns on continuously Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner when the parking brake is applied. The warning contents can be verified System Warning Light on the audio system. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light 86 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Parking Brake Warning - Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Parking brake warning / Warning light inspection The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released. Low brake fluid level warning If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately. The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) System Warning If the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous. When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

87 Warning Light What It Means Alternator Failure If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly. Low Engine Oil Pressure This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving: Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground. Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump. Inspect the engine oil level. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill. Start the engine and check the warning light. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Door-Open Warning Light The light turns on if any door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 88 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further. Handling procedure Flashing light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down. Illuminated light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “Overheating” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. Note: Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident.

89 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Key Warning Light — Illuminated If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously. Note: If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber) flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Key Warning Light — Flashing Advanced Key Fob Malfunction Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off. The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery. The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob into the operation range. A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in the operation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key out of the operation range. Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle, and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle.

Vehicle Security Alarm System The warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

90 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means ABS Warning Light If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, when the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABS warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery. The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated. Malfunction Indicator Light If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases: The engine's electrical system has a problem. The emission control system has a problem. The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty. The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely. If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at high speeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

91 Warning!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

Caution!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

92 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Warning Light — If Equipped The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. Note: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

93 Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

94 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light The light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously. Note: If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning. Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal.

95 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If Equipped The light illuminates when the transmission has a problem. Note: If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to your transmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Master Warning Light The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display and verify the content.

Cold Start Disable Indicator Light When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the engine starting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem. Note: Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enable engine starting. Electric Throttle Control Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

96 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Lights What It Means

Led Headlight Warning Light This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions: The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position. The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated. It turns on while driving the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters). The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid.

Cruise Control Activation — If Equipped The warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.

97 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TCS / DSC System Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the in case of intervention of TCS/DSC systems. This means that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

DSC Off Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the DSC system is deactivated.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not be installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

98 Green Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Left Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Right Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Parking Lights And Normal Beam Headlights The warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control — If Equipped The warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Key Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start. Warning light flashing When the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warning light may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of the key is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable.

99 Blue Warning Light

Warning Light What It Means

High Beam Headlights The warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after the engine is warm. If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

100 Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light What It Means Seat Belt Warning Light The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the warning light flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes again. With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on the passengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If a small child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate. Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, contact an authorized dealer.

101 Message Indicated On Note: Seat Belt Warning Beep Display When the ignition is placed in the Except Mexico If a message is displayed in the center ACC position, the “Ignition Not Cycled If the driver's seat belt is not fastened display, take appropriate action (in a Off Warning Beep” overrides the when the ignition is in the ON position, calm manner) according to the lights-on reminder. a beep sound will be heard for about displayed message. six seconds. A personalized function is available If the following messages are displayed to change the sound volume for the If the driver or the passengers seat belt in the center display, a vehicle system lights-on reminder. is not fastened and the vehicle is driven may be malfunctioning: at a speed faster than about 12 MPH Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner (20 km/h), a beep sound will be heard Engine Coolant Temperature System Warning Beep again for a specified period of time. High: displays if the engine coolant If there is a problem with the air temperature has increased excessively. Until a seat belt is fastened or a given bag/seat belt pretensioner systems and period of time has elapsed, the beep Charging System Malfunction: the warning light illumination, a warning sound will not stop even if the vehicle displays if the charging system has a beep sound will be heard for about speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). malfunction. 5 seconds every minute. The air bag and seat belt pretensioner Note: Temperature Warning:the system warning beep sound will To allow the passenger occupant following message is displayed when continue to be heard for approximately the temperature around the center classification sensor to function 35 minutes. Contact an authorized properly, do not place and sit on an display is high. Lowering the dealer as soon as possible. temperature of the inside of the vehicle additional seat cushion on the or the temperature around the center passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the display by avoiding direct sunlight is Caution! recommended. additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an authorized dealer. Do not drive the vehicle with the air If a small child is seated on the bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning passengers seat, the warning beep Warning Sound Is beep sounding. Driving the vehicle with the may not operate. Activated air bag/seat belt pretensioner system Mexico GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL warning beep sounding is dangerous. In a Lights-On Reminder collision, the air bags and the seat belt If the vehicle speed exceeds about If lights are on and the ignition is placed pretensioner system will not deploy and this 12 MPH (20 km/h) with the driver or in the ACC position, or the ignition is could result in death or serious injury. passengers seat belt unfastened, a placed in the OFF position, a Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. warning beep sounds continuously. If continuous beep sound will be heard the seat belt remains unfastened, the when the driver's door is opened. beep sound stops once and then 102 continues for about 90 seconds. The Ignition Not Switched OFF Request Switch Inoperable Warning beep stops after the driver or If the driver's door is opened while the Beep — If Equipped With Advanced passengers seat belt is fastened. ignition is placed in the ACC position, a Keyless Function Until a seat belt is fastened or a given continuous beep sound will be heard to If the request switch on the exterior period of time has elapsed, the beep notify the driver that the ignition has not door handle is pushed with a door sound will not stop even if the vehicle been placed in the OFF position. open, or the ignition has not been speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). Left in this condition, the keyless entry placed in the OFF position, a beep will system will not operate, the car cannot be heard for about two seconds to be locked, and the battery power will indicate that the doors, and trunk lid Warning! be depleted. cannot be locked. Key Removed From Vehicle Key Left-In-Trunk Compartment Warning Beep Warning Beep — If Equipped With Placing heavy items on the front Advanced Keyless Function passenger seat may cause the front A beep sound will be heard six times passenger seat belt warning function to and the warning light (red) will flash If the key fob is left in the trunk with all operate depending on the weight of the continuously if the ignition has not been doors locked and the trunk lid closed, a item. placed in the OFF position, all the doors beep sound is heard for about ten are closed, and the key fob is removed seconds to remind the driver the key To allow the front passenger seat weight fob has been left in the trunk. sensor to function properly, do not place from the vehicle. and sit on an additional seat cushion on the This is to notify the driver that the key If this happens, open the trunk lid by front passenger seat. The sensor may not fob has been removed from the vehicle pushing the electric trunk lid opener function properly because the additional and the ignition has not been placed in and remove the key fob. seat cushion could cause sensor the OFF position. A key fob removed from the trunk may interference. not function because its functions may When a small child sits on the front Note: Because the key fob uses have been temporarily suspended. To passenger seat, it is possible that the low-intensity radio waves, the restore the key fob function, perform warning beep will not operate. warning may activate if the key fob the applicable procedure (see is carried together with a metal object paragraph “Keys” in “Getting to know or it is placed in a poor signal reception your vehicle” chapter). area.

103 Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Reversing: if a moving object such as (with the advanced keyless function) Beep — If Equipped a vehicle or two-wheeled vehicle If a key fob is left in the vehicle and all Vehicle With Conventional Tires:the approaches on the left or right from the doors and the trunk are locked warning beep sound will be heard for behind your vehicle, the Blind Spot using a separate key fob, a beep sound about three seconds when there is any Monitoring (BSM) warning sound is is heard for about ten seconds to abnormality in tire inflation pressures activated. remind the driver that the key fob has (see “TMPS” in “Safety” chapter). Electronic Steering Lock Warning been left in the vehicle. Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires (If Beep If this happens, open the door and Equipped): the warning beep sound will The warning beep operates if the remove the key fob. A key fob removed be heard for about three seconds if the steering wheel is not unlocked after the from the vehicle this way may not tire pressures decrease. If the tire keyless ignition START/STOP button is function because its functions may pressure decreases extremely, a beep pushed. have been temporarily suspended. sound will be heard for approximately Speed Limiter Warning Beep — If Perform the applicable procedure to 30 seconds (see “TMPS” in “Safety” Equipped restore the functions of the key fob (see chapter). If the vehicle speed exceeds the set paragraph “Keys” in “Getting To Know Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) speed by about 2 MPH (3 km/h) or Your Vehicle” chapter). System Warning Beep — If more, a warning beep operates Vehicle Speed Alarm — If Equipped Equipped continuously. The vehicle speed alarm function is Driving Forward: the warning beep The warning beep operates until the designed to alarm the driver via a single operates when the direction indicator vehicle speed decreases to the set beep sound and a warning indication in lever is operated to the side where the speedorless. the instrument cluster that the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning previously set vehicle speed has been light is illuminated. exceeded. Note: A personalized function is You can change the vehicle speed available to change the Blind Spot setting at which the warning is triggered Monitoring (BSM) warning beep sound (see paragraph “Trip Computer” in volume. “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” chapter). GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

104 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES Overview The following Personalization Features can be set or changed by the customer or by an authorized dealer. Personalization Features differ depending on the market and specification. Settings change method 1. Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen A: Refer to the “Settings” paragraph in Fiat Connect 7.0 Supplement for further information. B: Refer to “Fuel Economy Monitor” paragraph in this chapter. 2. Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches C: Refer to “Auto Lock/Unlock Function” paragraph in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. D: Refer to “Key Fob” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. E: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With Request Switch (With The Advanced Keyless Function)” (Doors) in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. 3. Settings can be changed by an authorized dealer (refer to the following table) X: Refer to your authorized dealer for setting change.

Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Safety Blind Spot Monitoring Warning Beep Volume (*) High High/Low/Off A — X System (if equipped)

105 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Vehicle Lock: When Driving/Unlock: In Park/Lock: Out of Park Lock: When Operation condition of Unlock: In Park/Lock: Door Locks Driving/Unlock: IGN ACX auto lock/unlock function Shifting Out of Park/ Off Lock: When Driving Unlock: IGN Off/ Lock: When Driving/Off Keyless 90 seconds/ Time for locking door Entry 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically System seconds 90 seconds/ Time for locking door 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically Advanced seconds Keyless Auto-lock function Entry Off On/Off A — X operation/non operational System Beep volume when Off or Medium High/Medium/Low/Off A D/E X locking/unlocking 60 seconds/ Time until interior lights 15 seconds 30 seconds/15 A—X turn off after closing door Illuminated seconds/7.5 seconds Entry Time until interior lights System turn off automatically 60 minutes/

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 30 minutes A—X when any door is not 30 minutes/10 minutes closed completely Auto-Wiper Operational/non- On On/Off (**) A — X Control operational

106 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Daytime Operational/non- Running On On/Off — — X operational Lights (DRL) 120 seconds/ Auto Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/ headlight off 30 second A—X off 60 seconds/ (***) 30 seconds/Off (****) High/Med. Auto-Light Timing by which lights Medium High/Medium/Med. A—X Control turn on Low/Low Adaptive Front Operational/non- Lighting On On/Off A — X operational (***) System (AFS) Lights-On Reminder Warning beep volume High High/Low/Off A — X

120 seconds/ Coming Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/60 Home 30 seconds A—X off seconds/30 seconds/ System Off Leaving Operational/Non- Home Light On or Off On/Off A — X operational System Turn Signals Beep volume Low High/Low A — X Three-Flash Operational/Non- On or Off On/Off A — X Turn Signal operational

107 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 System Language indicated in Depends on market Language English A—X display (****) Temperature unit Temperature °C °F/°C A — X indicated in display Distance unit indicated in Distance mi or km mi/km A — X display Fuel Economy Monitor Ending On/Off Off On/Off B — X Display Fuel Linkage/non-linkage with Economy fuel economy reset and Off On/Off B — X Resetting trip meter reset Procedure (—) Feature setting change not available. (*) Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed. (**) If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation. (***) Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and FCA recommends that these systems remain On. (****) Available only in display from the center display. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

108 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Caution! Warning! SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a Prolonged driving with the MIL on could ONLY an authorized service technician sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic cause further damage to the emission should connect equipment to the OBD II system called OBD II. This system control system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to diagnose or monitors the performance of the economy and driveability. The vehicle must service your vehicle. emissions, engine, and automatic be serviced before any emissions tests can If unauthorized equipment is connected be performed. transmission control systems. When to the OBD II connection port, such as a these systems are operating properly, If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may: your vehicle will provide excellent running, severe catalytic converter damage Be possible that vehicle systems, performance and fuel economy, as well and power loss will soon occur. Immediate as engine emissions well within current including safety related systems, could be service is required. impaired or a loss of vehicle control could government regulations. occur that may result in an accident If any of these systems require service, Onboard Diagnostic involving serious injury or death. the OBD II system will turn on the System (OBD II) Access, or allow others to access, Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will Cybersecurity information stored in your vehicle systems, also store diagnostic codes and other including personal information. information to assist your service Your vehicle is required to have an technician in making repairs. Although Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) your vehicle will usually be drivable and and a connection port to allow access For further information, refer to “Privacy not need towing, see your authorized to information related to the Practices” and “Uconnect dealer for service as soon as possible. performance of your emissions CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect controls. Authorized service technicians Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio may need to access this information to Supplement. assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

109 EMISSIONS Your vehicle has a simple ignition The MIL will not flash at all and will INSPECTION AND actuated test, which you can use prior remain fully illuminated until you place MAINTENANCE to going to the test station. To check if the ignition in the off position or start PROGRAMS your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, the engine. This means that your you must do the following: vehicle's OBD II system is ready and In some localities, it may be a legal you can proceed to the I/M station. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON requirement to pass an inspection of If your OBD II system is not ready, you your vehicle's emissions control position, but do not crank or start the engine. should see your authorized dealer or system. Failure to pass could prevent repair facility. If your vehicle was vehicle registration. Note: If you crank or start the engine, recently serviced or had a battery failure you will have to start this test over. or replacement, you may need to do For states that require nothing more than drive your vehicle as an Inspection and 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition you normally would in order for your Maintenance (I/M), this switch to the ON position, you will see OBD II system to update. A recheck check verifies the the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” with the above test routine may then “Malfunction Indicator symbol come on as part of a normal indicate that the system is now ready. bulb check. Light (MIL)” is Regardless of whether your vehicle's functioning and is not on when the 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL engine is running, and that the OBD II of two things will happen: is illuminated during normal vehicle system is ready for testing. operation you should have your vehicle The MIL will flash for about Normally, the OBD II system will be serviced before going to the I/M station. 10 seconds and then return to being ready. The OBD II system may not be The I/M station can fail your vehicle fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ready if your vehicle was recently because the MIL is on with the engine ignition or start the engine. This means serviced, recently had a dead battery or running. a battery replacement. If the OBD II that your vehicle's OBD II system is not system should be determined not ready ready and you should not proceed to for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the the I/M station. test. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

110 SAFETY

SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 112 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .114 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS...... 122 SEAT BELT SYSTEMS ...... 122 CHILD RESTRAINT PRECAUTIONS ...... 128 SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEMSRS—AIRBAG...... 131 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .145 CONSTANT MONITORING ...... 147

111 SAFETY SYSTEMS Note: The ABS cannot prevent the natural Safety Systems Braking distances may be longer on laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for nor can it increase braking or steering The vehicle has the following safety example) which usually have a hard efficiency beyond that afforded by the systems: condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or SAFETY foundation. A vehicle with a normal the traction afforded. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) braking system may require less distance to stop under these The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Traction Contol System (TCS) conditions because the tires will build including those resulting from excessive up a wedge of surface layer when the speed in turns, following another vehicle Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) too closely, or hydroplaning. For the operation of the systems, see wheels skid. The capabilities of an ABS equipped the following pages. The sound of the ABS operating vehicle must never be exploited in a ABS System (Anti-lock may be heard when starting the engine reckless or dangerous manner that could Braking System) or immediately after starting the jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of vehicle; however, it does not indicate a others. The ABS control unit continuously malfunction. monitors the speed of each wheel. If one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS TCS System (Traction responds by automatically releasing Warning! Control System) and reapplying that wheel's brake. The driver will feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal and may hear a chattering The ABS contains sophisticated Warning! noise from the brake system. This is electronic equipment that may be normal ABS system operation. susceptible to interference caused by Continue to depress the brake pedal improperly installed or high output radio The capability of the TCS must never be without pumping the brakes. The transmitting equipment. This interference tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking warning light turns on when the system such a way as to compromise personal capability. Installation of such equipment safety and the safety of others. has a malfunction. Refer to “Warning should be performed by qualified Lights And Messages” in “Getting To professionals. Know Your Instrument Panel” for further The Traction Control System (TCS) information. Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will enhances traction and safety by diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping controlling engine torque and braking. distance longer. Just press firmly on your When the TCS detects driving wheel brake pedal when you need to slow down slippage, it can lower engine torque and or stop. operate the brakes to prevent loss of traction. This means that on a slick surface, the engine adjusts automatically to provide optimum 112 power to the drive wheels, limiting DSC System (Dynamic TCS / DSC Indicator Light wheel spin and loss of traction. Stability Control) The indicator light stays on for a few The indicator light turns on when the The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) seconds when the ignition is placed in system has a malfunction. Refer to automatically controls braking and the ON mode. It also illuminates when “Warning Lights And Messages” in engine torque in conjunction with the DSC OFF switch is pressed and “Getting To Know Your Instrument systems such as ABS and TCS to help TCS/DSC is switched off. Panel” for further information. control side slip when driving on If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or TCS / DSC Indicator Light slippery surfaces, or during sudden or the brake assist system may have a malfunction and they may not operate The indicator light stays on for a few evasive maneuvering, enhancing vehicle correctly. Take your vehicle to an seconds when the ignition is placed in safety. Refer to “ABS System (Antilock authorized dealer. the ON mode. Brake System)” and “TCS System (Traction Control System)” in this DSC OFF Indicator Light If the TCS or DSC is operating, the chapter for further information. indicator light flashes. The indicator light stays on for a few DSC operation is possible at speeds seconds when the ignition is placed in If the indicator light stays on, the greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). TCS, DSC or the brake assist system the ON mode. It also illuminates when may have a malfunction and they may The indicator light turns on when the the DSC OFF switch is pressed and not operate correctly. Contact your system has a malfunction. Refer to TCS/DSC is switched off. authorized dealer. “Warning Lights And Messages” in If the light remains illuminated and the “Getting To Know Your Instrument TCS/DSC is not switched off, contact Note: Panel” for further information. your authorized dealer. The DSC may In addition to the indicator light Note: The DSC may not operate have a malfunction. correctly unless the following are flashing, a slight sound will come from DSC OFF Switch the engine. This indicates that the observed: TCS/DSC is operating properly. Push the switch to turn off the Use tires of the correct size TCS/DSC. The indicator light in the On slippery surfaces, such as fresh specified for your vehicle on all four instrument cluster will illuminate. Push snow, it will be impossible to achieve wheels. the switch again to turn the TCS/DSC high rpm when the TCS is on. Use tires of the same manufacturer, back on. The indicator light will turn off. brand and tread pattern on all four wheels. Do not mix worn tires. Note: The DSC may not operate correctly when tire chains are used.

113 AUXILIARY DRIVING Warning! SYSTEMS Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannot SAFETY prevent the natural laws of physics from The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase system is designed to assist the driver the traction afforded by prevailing road during lane changes by alerting the conditions. DSC cannot prevent accidents, driver to the presence of vehicles including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane. 05060301-12A-001 surfaces, or hydroplaning. DSC also cannot DSC OFF Switch prevent accidents resulting from loss of The system detects vehicles vehicle control due to inappropriate driver approaching from the rear while Note: input for the conditions. Only a safe, traveling in the forward direction at a attentive, and skillful driver can prevent When DSC is on and you attempt speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) or faster, accidents. The capabilities of an DSC and will activate the BSM warning lights to free the vehicle when it is stuck, or equipped vehicle must never be exploited drive it out of freshly fallen snow, the in a reckless or dangerous manner which equipped within the door mirrors. TCS (part of the DSC system) will could jeopardize the user’s safety or the If the turn signal lever is operated to activate. Depressing the accelerator safety of others. signal a lane change in the direction in will not increase engine power and Vehicle modifications, or failure to which the warning light is illuminated, freeing the vehicle may be difficult. properly maintain your vehicle, may change the system warns the driver of a vehicle When this happens, turn off the the handling characteristics of your vehicle, in the detection area by flashing the TCS/DSC. and may negatively affect the performance warning light and activating an audible of the DSC system. Changes to the alert. If the TCS/DSC is off when the steering system, suspension, braking engine is turned off, it automatically The detection area on this system system, tire type and size or wheel size covers the driving lanes on both sides activates when the ignition is placed in may adversely affect DSC performance. the ON mode. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires of the vehicle and from the rear part of may also degrade DSC performance. Any the doors to about 164 ft (50 m) behind vehicle modification or poor vehicle the vehicle. maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the DSC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

114 The BSM system will not operate under objects, or it may be difficult to detect the following conditions: them: The vehicle speed falls below about A vehicle is in the detection area at 15 mph (25 km/h) even though the the rear in an adjacent driving lane but warning light is turned off. it does not approach. The BSM system determines the condition based on The gear selector is shifted to radar detection data. REVERSE. In the following cases, the warning light A vehicle is traveling alongside your in the instrument cluster illuminates and vehicle at nearly the same speed for an operation of the BSM system is extended period of time. deactivated. Vehicles approaching in the A problem with the system (including opposite direction. the BSM warning lights) is detected. A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane A large change in position of a rear is attempting to pass your vehicle. radar sensor on the vehicle has A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a 1 occurred. road with extremely wide driving lanes. There is a large accumulation of The detection area of the rear radar snow or ice on the rear bumper near a sensors is set at the road width of 0528070012A002 rear radar sensor . Remove any snow, expressways. BSM Detection Areas ice or mud on the rear bumper. In the following cases, the activation of the BSM warning lights and the audible 1 — Detection Area Driving on snow covered roads for alert may not occur, or they may be long periods. delayed: Activation / Deactivation The temperature near the rear radar A vehicle makes a lane change from sensors becomes extremely hot due to The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) a driving lane two lanes over to an driving for long periods on inclines system will operate when all of the adjacent lane. following conditions are met: during warm weather. Driving on steep inclines. The ignition is ON. The battery voltage has decreased. If the warning light in the instrument Crossing the summit of a hill or The BSM switch is pushed and the mountain pass. warning light in the instrument cluster is cluster remains illuminated, have the turned off. vehicle inspected at an authorized The turning radius is small (making a dealer as soon as possible. sharp turn or turning at intersections). The vehicle speed is 19 mph Note: Under the following conditions, (30km/h)orfaster. the rear radar sensors cannot detect 115 Whenthereisadifferenceinthe The system switches to the Rear Cross Additionally, while a warning light is height between your driving lane and Traffic Alert function when the gear illuminated, if the turn signal lever is the adjacent lane. selector is shifted to the REVERSE operated to signal a turn in the direction position. in which the warning light is illuminated, Immediately after pushing the BSM the warning light flashes. SAFETY switch and the system becomes BSM Warning Lights operable. The BSM warning lights are equipped Reverse Driving (RCTA System If the road width is extremely narrow, on the left and right door mirrors. Operation) vehicles two lanes over may be The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) detected. The detection area of the rear system detects vehicles approaching radar sensors is set according to the from the left and right of your vehicle road width of expressways. and flashes the BSM warning lights. The BSM warning lights may turn on in Function For Cancelling Illumination reaction to stationary objects on the Dimmer road or the roadside such as guardrails, When the headlight switch is in the tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles. or position, the brightness of A BSM warning light may flash or the the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) audible alert may be activated several warning lights is dimmed. If the Blind times when making a turn at a city Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights intersection. 05280701-12A-001 BSM Warning Light are difficult to see due to glare from Turn off the BSM system while pulling a surrounding brightness when traveling The warning lights turn on when a trailer or while an accessory such as a on snow-covered roads or under foggy vehicle approaching from the rear in an bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of conditions, push the dimmer adjacent lane is detected. the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s cancellation button to cancel the sound system waves will be blocked When the ignition is switched ON, the dimmer and increase the brightness of causing the system to not operate malfunction warning light in the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning normally. instrument cluster illuminates lights when they turn on. momentarily and then turns off after a In the following cases, it may be difficult Refer to “Instrument Panel Illumination” few seconds. to view the illumination/flashing of the in “Getting To Know Your Instrument BSM warning lights equipped on the Forward Driving (BSM System Panel” for further information. door mirrors: Operation) BSM Warning Beep Snow or ice is adhering to the door The BSM system detects vehicles The BSM audible alert is activated mirrors. approaching from the rear and turns on simultaneously with the flashing of a the warning lights equipped on the door The door glass is fogged or covered BSM warning light. mirrors according to the conditions. in snow, frost or dirt. 116 BSM Switch The BSM and RCTA systems are When the BSM switch is pushed, the turned off when the battery is BSM and RCTA systems are turned off disconnected such as when the and the BSM off indicator light in the battery terminals or fuses have been instrument cluster turns on. removed and reinstalled. To turn the If the switch is pushed again, the BSM BSM and RCTA systems back on, and RCTA systems become operable push the BSM switch. and the BSM off indicator light turns off. RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) Function The RCTA system is designed to assist the driver in checking the area to the 05281200-03A-001 rear of the vehicle on both sides while Rear Cross Traffic Alert the vehicle is in REVERSE by alerting 1 — Your Vehicle the driver to the presence of vehicles 2 — Approaching Vehicles Left And approaching the rear of the vehicle. Right The RCTA system detects vehicles approaching from the left and right sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is RCTA Operation reversing out of a parking space, and The RCTA system operates when the 05280703-12A-001 BSM Switch Location notifies the driver of possible danger gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE using the BSM warning lights and an position. Note: audible alert. If there is the possibility of a collision When the ignition is switched OFF, with an approaching vehicle, the BSM the condition before the system was warning light flashes and the audible turned off is maintained. For example, alert is activated simultaneously. if the ignition is switched OFF while the BSM and RCTA systems are operational, the BSM and RCTA systems remain operational the next time the ignition is switched ON.

117 With Rear View Camera In the following cases, the BSM off objects or it may be difficult to detect The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator light turns on and operation of them: the system is deactivated. If the BSM warning indication in the rearview The vehicle speed while in off indicator light in the instrument monitor also synchronizes with the REVERSE is about 6 mph (10 km/h ) Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning cluster remains illuminated: SAFETY or faster. indicator light on the door mirrors. A problem with the system including The rear radar sensor detection the BSM warning lights has occurred. area is obstructed by a nearby wall or A large change in the position of a parked vehicle (reverse the vehicle to a rear radar sensor on the vehicle has position where the radar sensor occurred. detection area is no longer obstructed). There is a large accumulation of A vehicle is approaching directly to snow or ice on the rear bumper near a the rear of your vehicle. rear radar sensor. The vehicle is parked on an incline. Driving on snow-covered roads for Immediately after pushing the BSM long periods. switch and the system becomes The temperature near the radar operable. sensors becomes extremely hot due to driving for long periods on inclines during warm weather. The battery voltage has decreased. Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Under the following conditions, the rear radar sensors cannot detect

0528140012A002 05281200-03A-003 RCTA Detection Sensors Obstructed By Nearby Vehicles

118 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Tire Pressure Monitoring System — Abarth The TPMS system monitors the pressure for each tire. If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the warning light in the instrument cluster and by the warning 05281200-03A-005 beep sound. Your Vehicle Parked On An Incline The tire pressure sensors installed on In the following cases, it may be difficult each wheel send tire pressure data by to view the illumination/flashing of the radio signal to the receiver unit in the BSM warning lights equipped on the vehicle. door mirrors: TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all Snow or ice adheres to the door four tires regularly. mirrors. Each tire, including the spare (if The door glass is fogged or covered equipped), should be checked monthly 05281200-03A-004 in snow, frost or dirt. Another Vehicle Approaching when cold and inflated to the inflation Directly To The Rear Of Your Turn off the RCTA system while pulling pressure recommended by the vehicle Vehicle a trailer or while an accessory such as a manufacturer on the vehicle placard or bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of tire inflation pressure label. (If your the vehicle. vehicle has tires of a different size than Otherwise, the sound system waves the size indicated on the vehicle placard emitted by the radar will be blocked or tire inflation pressure label, you causing the system to not operate should determine the proper tire normally. inflation pressure for those tires.)

119 As an added safety feature, your vehicle installation of replacement or alternate When excess snow or ice adheres to has been equipped with a tire pressure tires or wheels on the vehicle that the vehicle, especially around the monitoring system (TPMS) that prevent the TPMS from functioning wheels. illuminates a low tire pressure telltale properly. Always check the TPMS When the tire pressure sensor when one or more of your tires is malfunction telltale after replacing one SAFETY batteries are discharged. significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, or more tires or wheels on your vehicle when the low tire pressure telltale to ensure that the replacement or When using a wheel with no tire illuminates, you should stop and check alternate tires and wheels allow the pressure sensor installed. your tires as soon as possible, and TPMS to continue to function properly. When using tires with steel wire inflate them to the proper pressure. System Error Activation reinforcement in the side walls. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can When the warning light flashes, When using tire chains. lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also there may be a system malfunction. Tires And Wheels reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, Contact your authorized dealer. and may affect the vehicle's handling A system error activation may occur in Note: When inspecting or adjusting the and stopping ability. Please note that the following cases: tire air pressures, do not apply excessive force to the stem portion of the TPMS is not a substitute for proper When there is equipment or a device tire maintenance, and it is the driver's the wheel unit. The stem portion could near the vehicle using the same radio be damaged. responsibility to maintain correct tire frequency as that of the tire pressure pressure, even if under-inflation has not sensors. Changing Tires And Wheels reached the level to trigger illumination The following procedure allows the When a metallic device such as a of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. TPMS to recognize a tire pressure non-genuine navigation system is Your vehicle has also been equipped sensor's unique ID signal code equipped near the center of the with a TPMS malfunction indicator to whenever tires or wheels are changed, dashboard, which may block radio indicate when the system is not such as changing to and from winter signals from the tire pressure sensor to operating properly. When the system tires. detects a malfunction, the telltale will the receiver unit. flash for approximately one minute and When using the following devices in Note: then remain continuously illuminated. the vehicle that may cause radio Each tire pressure sensor has a This sequence will continue upon interference with the receiver unit. unique ID signal code. The signal code subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as must be registered with the TPMS the malfunction exists. When the A digital device such as a personal computer. before it can work. The easiest way to malfunction indicator is illuminated, the do it is to have your authorized dealer system may not be able to detect or A current converter device such as a change your tire and complete ID signal low tire pressure as intended. DC-AC converter. signal code registration. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the 120 When your authorized dealer The wheels equipped on your changes your vehicle's tires, they will vehicle are specially designed for Caution! complete the tire pressure sensor ID installation of the tire pressure sensors. signal code registration. Do not use non-genuine wheels, If you or someone else changes tires, otherwise it may not be possible to The TPMS has been optimized for the you or someone else can also install the tire pressure sensors. original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS undertake the steps for the TPMS to Be sure to have the tire pressure pressures and warning have been complete the ID signal code sensors installed whenever tires or established for the tire size equipped on registration: wheels are replaced. your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using After tires have been changed, place When having a tire or wheel or both replacement equipment that is not of the the ignition in the ON mode, then back replaced, the following types of tire same size, type, and/or style. The TPM to ACC or OFF modes. pressure sensor installations are sensor is not designed for use on possible: aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a Wait for about 15 minutes. poor overall system performance or sensor The tire pressure sensor is removed damage. Customers are encouraged to After about 15 minutes, drive the from the old wheel and installed to the use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM vehicle at a speed of at least 16 mph new one. feature operation. (25 km/h) for 20 minutes and the tire pressure sensor ID signal code will be The same tire pressure sensor is Using aftermarket tire sealants may registered automatically. used with the same wheel. Only the tire cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is replaced. (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After Note: If the vehicle is driven within using an aftermarket tire sealant it is about 15 minutes of changing tires, the A new tire pressure sensor is recommended that you take your vehicle to warning light will flash because the installed to a new wheel. an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. sensor ID signal code would not have Note: been registered. If this happens, park After inspecting or adjusting the tire the vehicle for about 15 minutes, after The tire pressure sensor ID signal pressure always reinstall the valve stem which the sensor ID signal code will code must be registered when a new cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt register upon driving the vehicle for tire pressure sensor is purchased. For from entering the valve stem, which could 20 minutes. purchase of a tire pressure sensor and damage the TPMS sensor. registration of the tire pressure sensor Replacing Tires And Wheels ID signal code, consult your authorized Note: dealer. When replacing/repairing the tires or When reinstalling a previously wheels or both, have the work done by removed tire pressure sensor to a your authorized dealer, or the tire wheel, replace the grommet (seal pressure sensors may be damaged. between valve body/sensor and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor. 121 The following regulatory statement OCCUPANT SEAT BELT applies to all radio frequency (RF) RESTRAINT SYSTEMS devices equipped in this vehicle: SYSTEMS Buckle up even though you are an This device complies with Part 15 of the excellent driver, even on short trips. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada The most important safety equipment SAFETY Someone on the road may be a poor license-exempt RSS standard(s). of the vehicle comprise the following driver and could cause a collision that Operation is subject to the following protection systems: includes you. This can happen far away two conditions: Seat Belts from home or on your own street. (1) This device may not cause harmful SBA (Seat Belt Alert) System Research has shown that seat belts interference, and Head Restraints save lives, and they can reduce the (2) This device must accept any seriousness of injuries in a collision. interference received, including Child Restraint Systems Some of the worst injuries happen interference that may cause undesired Front Air Bags And Side Air Bags when people are thrown from the operation. vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility Note: Changes or modifications not Read the information given in the of ejection and the risk of injury caused expressly approved by the party following pages with the utmost care. by striking the inside of the vehicle. responsible for compliance could void It is of fundamental importance that the Everyone in a motor vehicle should be the user’s authority to operate the protection systems are used in the belted at all times. equipment. correct way to guarantee the maximum possible safety level for the driver and the passengers.

122 Seat Belt Precautions to “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors,” Do not allow people to ride in any area found in Servicing And Maintenance” Seat belts help to decrease the of your vehicle that is not equipped with for further information. possibility of severe injury during seats and seat belts. accidents and sudden stops. FCA Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a recommends that the driver and seat and using a seat belt properly. passengers always wear seat belts. Occupants, including the driver, should Mexico always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating All the seats have lap/shoulder belts. position to minimize the risk of severe injury These belts have retractors with inertia or death in the event of a crash. locks that keep them out of the way Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could when not in use. make your injuries in a collision much The locks allow the belts to remain worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or comfortable on users, but they will lock you could even slide out of the seat belt. in position during a collision. 03020100-12A-001 Follow these instructions to wear your seat Seat Belt Routing Guide belt safely and to keep your passengers Except Mexico safe, too. All of the seat belt retractors are Two people should never be belted into designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts Warning! a single seat belt. People belted together out of the way when not in use. can crash into one another in a collision, The driver's seat belt has no provisions hurting one another badly. Never use a for child-restraint systems and has only Relying on the air bags alone could lead lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than an emergency locking mode. to more severe injuries in a collision. The air one person, no matter what their size. The driver may wear it comfortably, and bags work with your seat belt to restrain A lap belt worn too high can increase you properly. In some collisions, the air it will lock during a collision. the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic However, the passenger's seat seat belt even though you have air bags. bones, but across your abdomen. Always lap/shoulder belt retractor operates in In a collision, you and your passengers wear the lap part of your seat belt as low two modes: emergency locking mode, can suffer much greater injuries if you are as possible and keep it snug. and for child-restraint systems, not properly buckled up. You can strike the automatic locking mode. If you must A twisted seat belt may not protect you interior of your vehicle or other passengers, properly. In a collision, it could even cut into use the passenger seat for a child, slide or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against the passenger seat as far back as Always be sure you and others in your your body, without twists. If you can’t possible and make sure any child vehicle are buckled up properly. straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it restraint system is secured properly. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, to your authorized dealer immediately and Belt retraction may become difficult if inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, have it fixed. the belts and seat belt guides are people riding in these areas are more likely soiled, so try to keep them clean. Refer to be seriously injured or killed. 123 A seat belt that is buckled into the Seat Belts And Pregnant Emergency Locking wrong buckle will not protect you properly. Women Mode The lap portion could ride too high on your Pregnant Women And Persons With When the seat belt is fastened, it will body, possibly causing internal injuries. Serious Medical Conditions Always buckle your seat belt into the always be in the emergency locking SAFETY buckle nearest you. Pregnant women should always wear mode. seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific In the emergency locking mode, the A seat belt that is too loose will not recommendations. belt remains comfortable on the protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY occupant and the retractor will lock in possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER position during a collision. snugly. THE HIPS. The shoulder belt should be If the belt is locked and cannot be A seat belt that is worn under your arm worn across your shoulder properly, but pulled out, retract the belt once, and is dangerous. Your body could strike the never across the stomach area. then try pulling it out slowly. If this fails, inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, pull the belt strongly one time and increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt loosen, then pull it out again slowly. worn under the arm can cause internal Seat Belt With Automatic Locking injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder Mode bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will When the seat belt is fastened, it will take the force in a collision. always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic A shoulder belt placed behind you will locking mode by pulling it all the way not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your out to its full length. head in a collision if you do not wear your If the belt feels tight and hinders

shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are 06050100-CHD-003 comfortable movement while the meant to be used together. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart be in the automatic locking mode Persons with serious medical because the belt has been pulled too in a collision and leave you with no conditions also should wear seat belts. protection. Inspect the seat belt system far out. Check with your doctor for any special periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or To return the belt to the more loose parts. Damaged parts must be instructions regarding specific medical conditions. comfortable emergency locking mode, replaced immediately. Do not disassemble wait until the vehicle has stopped in a or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to collision. convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it around you again.

124 Automatic Locking Mode Lap/Shoulder Belts 3 Always use the automatic locking mode Fastening The Seat Belt to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking 1 mode, pull it all the way out and 1 2 connect it as instructed on the child restraint system. It will retract down to the child restraint system and stay locked on it. 2 03020201122002 Adjusting The Seat Belt 1 — Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area Warning! 03020201121001 2 — Lap Belt Routing Fastening The Seat Belt 3 — Shoulder Belt Routing 1 — Seat Belt 2 — Seat Belt The seat belt assembly must be Tongue Buckle replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working Position the lap belt as low as possible, properly when checked according to the not on the abdominal area 2, then procedures in the Service Manual. adjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fits Failure to replace the seat belt assembly snugly against your body. could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

125 Unfastening The Seat Belt not hold in the critical moment of a Depress the button on the seat belt 1 crash. buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, When ordering an extender, only order pull it out and check for kinks or twists. one that provides the necessary Then make sure it remains untwisted as additional length to fasten the seat belt SAFETY it retracts. properly. Please contact authorized dealer for more information. When not in use, remove the seat belt extender and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt extender is left connected,

0302020012A001 the seat belt extender might get Seat Belt Routing Guides damaged as it will not retract with the rest of the seat belt and can easily fall 1 — Shoulder Belt Routing Guides out of the door when not in use and be 1 damaged. Seat Belt Warning In addition, the seat belt warning light Systems will not illuminate and function properly. 03020202UNF001 Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt If it detects that the occupant seat belt 1 — Seat Belt Release Button is unfastened, the warning light or beep alerts the occupant. Warning! Referto“WarningLightsAnd Note: Messages” in “Getting To Knowing Your Do not use a seat belt extender unless it If a belt does not fully retract, Instrument Panel” for further is necessary. Using a seat belt extender inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still information. when not necessary is dangerous. The not retracting properly, have it Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” in seat belt will be too long and not fit inspected: contact an authorized “Getting To Knowing Your Instrument properly. In an accident, the seat belt will dealer. Panel” for further information. not provide adequate protection and you could be seriously injured. Only use the Always wear the seat belt with it Seat Belt Extender extender when it is required to fasten the correctly routed in its guide. Wearing a seat belt properly. If your seat belt is not long enough, seat belt without the seat belt routed in even when fully extended, a seat belt Do not use an improper extender. Using its guide is dangerous because the extender may be available to you at no a seat belt extender that is for another seat belt would not be able to provide charge from authorized dealer. person or a different vehicle or seat is adequate protection in an accident, dangerous. The seat belt will not provide which could result in serious injury. This extender will be only for you and adequate protection and the user could be for the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it plugs into other seat belts, it may 126 seriously injured in an accident. Only use restraint system manufacturer's installation pretensioners operate differently the extender provided for you and for the instructions and never use a seat belt depending on what types of air bags particular vehicle and seat. extender. are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation, refer to the NEVER use the extender in a different vehicle or seat. If you sell your vehicle, do “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” Driver And Passenger paragraph in this chapter. not leave your seat belt extender in the BeltAlert (If Equipped) vehicle. It could be used accidentally by the When a collision is detected, the new owner of the vehicle. After removing Seat Belt Warning Systems the seat belt extender, discard it. Never use pretensioners deploy simultaneously with the seat belt extender in any other vehicle The LED on dashboard trim turns on if the air bags. For deployment details, refer you may own in the future. the driver or passenger's seat is to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” Do not use an extender that is too long. occupied and the seat belt is not paragraph in this chapter. Using an extender that is too long is fastened with the ignition switched ON. The seat belt retractors remove slack dangerous. The seat belt will not fit quickly as the air bags are expanding. Any properly. In an accident, the seat belt will If the driver or passenger's seat belt is not provide adequate protection and you unfastened (only when the passenger time the air bags and seat belt could be seriously injured. Do not use the seat is occupied) and the vehicle is pretensioners have fired they must be extender or choose one shorter in length if driven at a speed faster than about replaced. the distance between the extender's buckle and the center of the user's body is 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes. With Passenger Occupant less than 6 inches (15 cm). After a short time, the LED stops Classification System Do not leave a seat belt extender flashing, but remains illuminated. In addition, the pretensioner system for connected to the buckle. Leaving a seat If a seat belt remains unfastened, the the passenger, like the front and side belt extender connected to the buckle LED flashes again for a given period of passenger Air Bag, is designed to only without using the seat belt is dangerous. When the seat belt extender is connected time. In this case, fasten the seat belt. deploy when the passenger occupant to the driver's seat belt buckle (or Seat Belt Pretensioner classification sensor detects a passenger passenger) seat, the SRS driver's (or sitting on the passenger's seat. passenger's) air bag system will determine For optimum protection, the driver and that the driver (or passenger) is wearing the Note: seat belt even if the driver (or passenger) is passenger seat belts are equipped with not wearing it. This condition could cause pretensioner and load limiting systems. These devices are not a substitute the driver's (or passenger's) air bag to not For both these systems to work for proper seat belt placement by the activate correctly and result in death or properly you must wear the seat belt occupant. The seat belt still must be serious injury in the event of collision. worn snugly and positioned properly. Always wear the seat belt with the seat belt properly. extender. The seat belt pretensioners are The pretensioners are triggered by Do not use the seat belt extender when designed to deploy in moderate or the Occupant Restraint Controller installing a child restraint system on the severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In (ORC). Like the air bags, the passenger seat. Using a seat belt extender addition, during a side collision, the pretensioners are single use items. A to fasten a child restraint system on any pretensioner operates on the side in deployed pretensioner or a deployed seat is dangerous. Always follow the child which the collision occurs. The air bag must be replaced immediately. 127 Load Limiter CHILD RESTRAINT With Passenger Occupant Classification System The load limiting system releases belt PRECAUTIONS To reduce the chance of injuries caused webbing in a controlled manner to Child Restraints reduce belt force on the occupant's by deployment of the passenger Air Bag, the passenger occupant SAFETY chest. FCA strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small classification sensor work as a part of While the most severe load on a seat enough to use them. the supplementary restraint system. belt occurs in frontal collisions, the load limiter has an automatic mechanical FCA recommends use of a genuine This system deactivates the passenger function and can activate in any child-restraint system or one that front and side Air Bags and also the accident mode with sufficient occupant complies with regulation. If you would passenger seat belt pretensioner movement. like to purchase a FCA genuine system when the OFF passenger Air child-restraint system, please contact a Bag deactivation indicator light Even if the pretensioners have not fired, authorized dealer. illuminates. the load limiting function must be checked by an authorized dealer. Check your local and state or provincial When an infant or small child sits on the laws for specific requirements regarding passenger seat, the system shuts off the safety of children riding in your the passenger front and side Air Bags vehicle. and seat belt pretensioner system, so Whatever child-restraint system you make sure the OFF passenger Air consider, please pick the appropriate Bag deactivation indicator light one for the age and size of the child, illuminates. For more details, refer to obey the law and follow the instructions "Passenger Occupant Classification that come with the individual Sensor" in “Supplementary Restraint child-restraint system. System SRS — Air Bag” for additional A child who has outgrown information. child-restraint systems should use seat Note: A seat belt or child-restraint belts, both lap and shoulder. If the system can become very hot in a shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, closed vehicle during warm weather. To move the child closer to the center of avoid burning yourself or a child, check the vehicle. them before you or your child touches A rear-facing child-restraint system them. should NEVER be used on the passenger seat with the Air Bag system activated. In the event of an impact the Air Bag activation may cause fatal injuries to the transported child. 128 Note: Child Seat Warning! Installation position is determined A child seat restrains a child's body by the type of child restraint system. using the harness. Always read the manufacturer's Improper installation can lead to failure instructions and this Owner Handbook of an infant or child restraint. It could come carefully. loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child Due to variations in the design of restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly child restraint systems, vehicle seats when installing an infant or child restraint. and seat belts, not all child restraint After a child restraint is installed in the may fit all seating positions. vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen Before purchasing a child-restraint the child restraint attachments. Remove system, it should be tested in the the child restraint before adjusting the specific vehicle seating position (or 03030202CHD001 vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat positions) where it is intended to be Child Seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child used. If a previously purchased restraint. child-restraint system does not fit, you Booster Seat When your child restraint is not in use, may need to purchase a different one A booster seat is a child restraint secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or that will. accessory designed to improve the fit of LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the Infant Seat the seat belt system around the child's vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. An infant seat provides restraint by body. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause bracing the infant's head, neck and serious personal injury. back against the seating surface.

Child Restraint System Types In this Owner Handbook, explanation of child restraint systems secured with seat belts is provided for the following three types of popular child-restraint systems: infant seat, child seat, booster 03030202BOO001 seat. Booster Seat

06070809INF001 Infant Seat 129 vehicle as there is no safe way to clicking noise from the retractor will be anchor the tether. Confirm whether the heard during retraction if the system is Warning! child restraint system can be used with in automatic locking mode. If the belt seat belts by reading the child restraint does not lock the seat down tight, Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt system manufacturer's instructions. repeat the previous step and also this SAFETY under an arm or behind their back. In a Passengers Seat Child Restraint one. crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a System Installation (With Passenger Seat your child safely in the child properly, which may result in serious Occupant Classification System) injury or death. A child must always wear child-restraint system and secure the both the lap and shoulder portions of the Proceed as follows: child according to the instructions from seat belt correctly. Make sure the ignition is switched the child-restraint system manufacturer. off. Note: Inspect this function before Child Seat Installation Slide the seat as far back as each use of the child restraint system. Position possible. You should not be able to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor while The passenger lap/shoulder belt can Place the child-restraint system on easily be converted into the automatic the system is in the automatic locking the seat without putting your weight on mode. When you remove the locking mode, which must be done to the seat and secure the child-restraint hold the child-restraint system. child-restraint system, be sure the belt system with the lap portion of the fully retracts to return the system to Note: To check if your seats have side lap/shoulder belt. See the emergency locking mode before air bags: FCA vehicles equipped with manufacturer's instructions on the occupants use the seat belts. side air bag will have an embossed child-restraint system for belt routing "SRS AIRBAG" marking on the instructions. Place the ignition in the ON position outboard shoulder of the seats. and make sure the passenger air bag To get the retractor into the Follow the child restraint system deactivation indicator light illuminates automatic locking mode, pull the manufacturer's instructions carefully. after installing a child restraint system shoulder belt portion of the seat belt Depending on the type of child restraint on the passenger seat. If the passenger until the entire length of the belt is out of system, it may not employ seat belts air bag deactivation indicator light does the retractor. which are in automatic locking mode, not illuminate, remove the child restraint however if it uses an upper tether, it Push the child-restraint system firmly system, place the ignition in the OFF may not be mounted properly in this into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt position, and then reinstall the child retracts as snugly as possible. A restraint system.

130 SUPPLEMENTARY during an accident. Seat belt usage is RESTRAINT SYSTEM necessary to: SRS — AIR BAG Keep the occupant from being Description thrown into an inflating Air Bag. The front and side Supplementary Reduce the possibility of injuries Restraint Systems (SRS) include during an accident that is not designed different types of Air Bags. for Air Bag inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact. Note: Please verify which kinds of Air Bags are equipped on your vehicle by Reduce the possibility of injuries in

06070400567567 locating the “SRS AIR BAG” location frontal, near frontal or side collisions Passenger Air Bag Deactivation indicators. that are not severe enough to activate Light These indicators are visible in the area the Air Bags. where the Air Bags are installed. Reduce the possibility of being The Air Bags are installed in the thrown from your vehicle. following locations: Warning! Reduce the possibility of injuries to The steering wheel hub (Driver Air lower body and legs during an accident Bag) because the Air Bags provide no protection to these parts of the body. Never place a rear-facing child restraint The passenger dashboard in front of an air bag. A deploying (Passenger Air Bag) Hold the driver in a position which passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can allows better control of the vehicle. cause death or serious injury to a child The outer sides of the seat backs 12 years or younger, including a child in a (Side Air Bags) rear-facing child restraint. This vehicle has front air bags and Warning! Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a lap/shoulder belts for both the driver vehicle with a rear seat. and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt In order for the Side Air Bags to work as An incorrectly anchored tether strap restraint systems. could lead to increased head motion and intended, do not install any accessory possibly injury to the child. Use only the The Air Bag supplementary restraint items in your vehicle which could alter the anchorage position directly behind the child systems are designed to provide roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to seat to secure a child restraint top tether supplementary protection in certain your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that strap. situations so seat belts are always require permanent attachments (bolts or important in the following ways. screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for Without seat belt usage, the Air Bags any reason. cannot provide adequate protection 131 If your vehicle is also equipped with Do not use a child-restraint system a passenger occupant classification which employs an upper tether Warning! system, refer to the “Passenger because there is no appropriate means Occupant Classification System” to anchor the tether. paragraph for further information. Unapproved modifications or service SAFETY If your vehicle is equipped with a procedures to the passenger seat passenger occupant classification Warning! assembly, its related components, seat system, the passenger Air Bag cover or cushion may inadvertently change deactivation indicator light illuminates the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or If the Indicator Light remains illuminated for a specified time after the ignition has serious injury to the front passenger if the for an adult passenger, have an authorized been placed in the ON position. vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified dealer service the air bag system vehicle may not comply with required immediately. Failure to do so may cause Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards serious injury or death. If the Indicator Light (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle is illuminated with the words “PASS Safety Standards (CMVSS). AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of If it is necessary to modify the air bag a collision. system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing 06070400567567 child restraint. Passenger Air Bag Deactivated Light Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Small children must be protected by a Children 12 years or younger should child-restraint system as stipulated by always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a law in every state and province. In rear seat. certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint system. Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions. 132 Supplementary Restraint System Components With Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-121-002 With Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And 5 — Side Crash Sensors 9 — Passenger Occupant Air Bags Classification Sensor 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner 10 — Passenger Occupant Module (Sas Unit) System Warning Light Classification Module 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 8 — Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light

133 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System SAFETY

03040300-122-003 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags Air Bags 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 5 — Side Crash Sensors Module (Sas Unit) 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light

134 How The SRS Air Bags Passenger Air Bag Work (Dual Stage) This vehicle has front air bags and The passenger Air Bag is mounted in lap/shoulder belts for both the driver the passenger dashboard. and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The SRS Air Bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to the seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly. 06010203-126-123 Seat Belt Pretensioners Driver Side Air Bags The seat belt pretensioners are When Air Bag crash sensors detect a designed to deploy in moderate or frontal impact of greater than moderate severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In force, the driver's Air Bag inflates 06010204-126-123 addition, during a side collision, the quickly helping to reduce injury mainly Passenger Side Air Bag pretensioner operates on the side in to the driver's head or chest caused by which the collision occurs. directly hitting the steering wheel. For The inflation mechanism for the passenger Air Bag is the same as the The pretensioners operate differently more details about Air Bag deployment, driver's Air Bag, as mentioned above. depending on what types of air bags refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment For more details about Air Bag are equipped. For details on the seat Criteria" in this chapter for further deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag belt pretensioner operation, refer to the information. Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”. (With Passenger Occupant For further details about air bag Driver Air Bag Classification System) deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag The driver's air bag is mounted in the The driver's dual-stage air bag controls Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. steering wheel. air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an impact of moderate severity, the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.

135 Side Air Bags Bag Deployment Criteria" in this chapter for further information. The side air bags are mounted in the Warning! outer sides of the seat backs. When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, If a child restraint system, child, small SAFETY Warning! the system inflates the side air bag only teenager or adult in the front passenger on the side in which the vehicle was hit. seat is seated improperly, the occupant Occupants, including children, who are may provide an output signal to the OCS up against or very close to SABs can be that is different from the occupant’s seriously injured or killed. Occupants, properly seated weight input. This may including children, should never lean on or result in serious injury or death in a sleep against the door, side windows, or collision. area where the side air bags inflate, even if Always wear your seat belt and sit they are in an infant or child restraint. properly, with the seatback in an upright Seat belts (and child restraints where position, your back against the seatback, appropriate) are necessary for your sitting upright, facing forward, in the center protection in all collisions. They also help of the seat, with your feet comfortably on keep you in position, away from an inflating or near the floor. SAB. To get the best protection from the Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., SABs, occupants must wear their seat backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the belts properly and sit upright with their front passenger seat. Holding an object backs against the seats. Children must be may provide an output signal to the OCS properly restrained in a child restraint or that is different than the occupant’s booster seat that is appropriate for the size properly seated weight input, which may of the child. result in serious injury or death in a collision. With Passenger Occupant Placing an object on the floor under the Classification System front passenger seat may prevent the OCS In addition, the passenger side bag is from working properly, which may result in 06010205-126-123 serious injury or death in a collision. Do not Side Air Bags designed to only deploy when the passenger occupant classification place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. The side air bag inflates quickly to sensor detects a passenger sitting on reduce injury to the driver or the passenger's seat. passenger's head and chest caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window. For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air 136 Warning Light/Beep A system malfunction or operation Warning! conditions are indicated by a warning. Refer to the beginning paragraph of “Warning Lights And Messages” in Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do “Getting To Know Your Instrument not lean against the door or window. Sit Panel” for further information. upright in the center of the seat. Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be Warning! severely injured or killed. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt instrument panel could mean you won’t to restrain you properly. In some collisions, have the air bags to protect you in a Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always collision. If the light does not come on as a wear your seat belt even though you have bulb check when the ignition is first turned Side Air Bags. on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

03030101-121-001 Passenger Side Front Air Bag And Sun Visor Air Bag Labels Child Restraint Systems Rearward-facing child restraint systems Warning! must NEVER be fitted on the front seat with an active passenger side air bag since in the event of an impact the air Do not use accessory seat covers or place bag activation may cause fatal injuries objects between you and the Side Air to the transported child. Bags; the performance could be adversely ALWAYS comply with the instructions affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. on the label stuck on the passenger side sun visor : A = Mexico market/ B = U.S.A. and Canada market.

137 SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision (the illustrations are the representative cases of collisions). Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt SAFETY pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Types Of Collision

SRS Equipment A Severe Frontal/Near A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision Frontal Collision

SRS Equipment

Seat Belt Pretensioner X (**) (Both Sides) X (**) (Impact Side Only) Driver Air Bag X No air bag and seat belt pretensioner will be activated in Passenger Air Bag X (**) a rear collision Side Air Bag X (**) (Impact Side Only) X: the SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision. (*) In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side air bags deploy (only on the side in which the collision occurs). 138 (**) Passenger Occupant Classification System: the passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to deploy when the passenger occupant classification sensor detects a passenger sitting on the passenger's seat. Note: In a frontal offset collision, the equipped air bags and pretensioners may all deploy depending on the direction, angle, and rate of impact.

Warning!

Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the occupant classification sensor from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. If there is a fault present in the occupant classification sensor, both the Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

139 Limitations To SRS Air Bag A In severe collisions such as those described in "SRS Air Bag Deployment

SAFETY Criteria" paragraph, the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents, the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity. Limitations To Front / Near Front Collision Detection 03040600-122-001 B Rear End Collision Front/near front collisions may not be detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment: Limitations To Side Collision Impacts involving trees or poles A. Detection Side collisions may not be detected as Frontal offset impact to the vehicle B. severe enough to deploy the SRS air Rear-ending or running under a bag equipment: truck's tail gate. Side impacts involving trees or poles 03040600-121-001 A. Front/Near Front Collision Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles B. Roll-over.

140 Passenger Occupant Note: If a passenger is seated as A Classification Sensor shown in the following figure the passenger occupant classification Your vehicle is equipped with a sensor cannot detect a passenger passenger occupant classification sitting on the passenger's seat correctly sensor as a part of the supplementary and the deployment/non-deployment of restraint system. This sensor is the Air Bags cannot be controlled as equipped in the passenger's seat indicated in the passenger Air Bag cushion. This sensor measures the deactivation indicator light on/off electrostatic capacity of the condition chart. passenger's seat. The SRS unit is designed to prevent the B passenger front and side Air Bags and Warning! seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if the passenger Air Bag deactivation indicator light turns on. If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in the front passenger To reduce the chance of injuries caused seat is seated improperly, the occupant by deployment of the passenger Air may provide an output signal to the Bag, the system deactivates the occupant classification sensor that is passenger front and side Air Bags and different from the occupant’s properly also the seat belt pretensioner system seated weight input. This may result in 03040600-123-001 when the passenger Air Bag serious injury or death in a collision. Side Collision deactivation indicator light turns on. This system shuts off the passenger Warning! front and side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the passenger Air Bag deactivation Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in indicator light turns on. your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a The air bag/seat belt pretensioner collision. If the light does not come on as a system warning light flashes and the bulb check when the ignition is first turned passenger Air Bag deactivation on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if indicator light illuminates if the sensors it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag have a possible malfunction. If this system immediately. happens, the passenger front and side

03040600-124-002 Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner Roll-Over Collision system will not deploy. 141 Placing an object on the floor under the Passenger Air Bag Deactivation front passenger seat may prevent the Indicator Lights occupant classification sensor from These indicator lights turn on to remind working properly, which may result in you that the passenger front and side serious injury or death in a collision. Do not Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner will SAFETY place any objects on the floor under the or will not deploy during a collision. front passenger seat. If there is a fault present in the occupant classification sensor, both the Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately. 06070400567567 Passenger Air Bag Deactivated

03040702-12A-001 Passenger Not Sitting Correct Warning!

Warning! If the Indicator Light remains illuminated for an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., immediately. Failure to do so may cause backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the serious injury or death. If the Indicator Light front passenger seat. Holding an object is illuminated with the words “PASS may provide an output signal to the AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced occupant classification sensor that is Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of different than the occupant’s properly a collision. seated weight input, which may result in Never place a rear-facing child restraint serious injury or death in a collision. in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or

142 serious injury to a child 12 years or The passenger air bag deactivation If the passenger Air Bag younger, including a child in a rear-facing indicator light may turn on for deactivation indicator light turns on child restraint. 10 seconds if the electrostatic capacity when an occupant is seated directly in on the passenger seat changes. the passenger seat, have the Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a passenger readjust their posture by vehicle with a rear seat. The air bag/seat belt pretensioner sitting with their feet on the floor, and system warning light might turn on if Children 12 years or younger should then refastening the seat belt. If the the passenger seat receives a severe always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a passenger Air Bag deactivation impact. rear seat. indicator light remains turned on, slide Note: If the passenger Air Bag the passenger seat as far back as deactivation indicator light does not possible. Contact an authorized dealer The system requires about turn on after installing a child restraint as soon as possible. 10 seconds to alternate between system on the passenger seat, first, turning the passenger front and side reinstall your child restraint system Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner according to the procedure in this system on or off. Owner Handbook. Then, if the The passenger air bag deactivation passenger Air Bag deactivation OFF indicator light may turn on repeatedly if indicator light still does not turn on, luggage or other items are put on the contact an authorized dealer as soon passenger seat, or if the temperature as possible. of the vehicle's interior changes suddenly.

143 Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light On/Off Condition Chart If the passenger occupant classification sensor is normal, the indicator light turns on when the ignition is switched ON. The light turns off after a few seconds. Then, the indicator light turns on or is off under the following conditions: SAFETY Condition Detected By The Passenger Air Bag Passenger Front And Side Air Passenger Seat Belt Passenger Occupant Deactivation Indicator Light Bags Pretensioner System Classification System Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated A child is seated in a child On Deactivated Deactivated restraint system (*) Adult (**) Off Ready Ready (*) The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child restraint system, or a junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture. (**) If a smaller adult sits on the passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on the person's physique. If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is switched ON and does not turn on as indicated in the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the passenger seat and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

144 won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat EVENT DATA Warning! belts even though you have air bags. RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event Maintaining Your Air Bag data recorder (EDR). Never place a rear-facing child restraint System in front of an air bag. A deploying The main purpose of an EDR is to passenger front air bag can cause death or record, in certain crash or near serious injury to a child 12 years or crash-like situations, such as an air bag Warning! younger, including a child in a rear-facing deployment or hitting a road obstacle, child restraint. data that will assist in understanding Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Modifications to any part of the air bag how a vehicle’s systems performed. vehicle with a rear seat. system could cause it to fail when you The EDR is designed to record data need it. You could be injured if the air bag related to vehicle dynamics and safety Children 12 years or younger should system is not there to protect you. Do not always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a systems for a short period of time, modify the components or wiring, including rear seat. typically 30 seconds or less. adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the The EDR in this vehicle is designed to upper right side of the instrument panel. Do record such data as: Warning! not modify the front bumper, vehicle body How various systems in your vehicle structure, or add aftermarket side steps or were operating. running boards. No objects should be placed over or It is dangerous to try to repair any part Whether or not the driver and near the air bag on the instrument panel or of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to passenger safety belts were steering wheel because any such objects tell anyone who works on your vehicle that buckled/fastened. could cause harm if the vehicle is in a it has an air bag system. collision severe enough to cause the air How far (if at all) the driver was bag to inflate. Do not attempt to modify any part of your pushing the accelerator and/or brake air bag system. The air bag may inflate pedal. Do not put anything on or around the air accidentally or may not function properly if bag covers or attempt to open them modifications are made. Take your vehicle to How fast the vehicle was traveling. manually. You may damage the air bags an authorized dealer for any air bag system This data can help provide a better and you could be injured because the air service. If your seat, including your trim cover bags may no longer be functional. The and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way understanding of the circumstances in protective covers for the air bag cushions (including removal or loosening/tightening of which crashes and injuries occur. are designed to open only when the air seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to bags are inflating. your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it Relying on the air bags alone could lead is necessary to modify the air bag system for to more severe injuries in a collision. The air persons with disabilities, contact your bags work with your seat belt to restrain authorized dealer. you properly. In some collisions, air bags 145 Note: Ordered by a judge or court. Data Handling EDR data are recorded by your However, if necessary, FCA will: FCA and its subcontracting parties may obtain and use the recorded data for vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near Use the data for research on FCA vehicle malfunction diagnosis, research crash-like situation occurs; no data are vehicle performance, including safety. and development, and quality SAFETY recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal Disclose the data or the improvement. data (e.g., name, gender, age, and summarized data to a third party for FCA will not disclose or provide any of crash location) are recorded. However, research purposes without disclosing the obtained data to a third party other parties, such as law vehicle or owner identification unless: information. enforcement, could combine the EDR An agreement from the vehicle Recording Of Vehicle Data data with the type of personally owner (agreements from lessor and identifying data routinely acquired This vehicle is equipped with a lessee for leased vehicle) is obtained. during a crash investigation. computer which records the following main vehicle data related to vehicle Officially requested by the police or To read data recorded by an EDR, other law enforcement authorities. special equipment is required, and controls, operation, and other driving access to the vehicle or the EDR is conditions. For statistical processing by a needed. In addition to the vehicle Recorded Data research institution, after processing manufacturer, other parties, such as Vehicle conditions such as engine the data so that identification of the law enforcement, that have the special speed and vehicle speed. owner or the vehicle is impossible. equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the Driving operation conditions such EDR.FCA will not disclose any of the as accelerator and brake pedals, and data recorded in an EDR to a third party information related to the unless: environmental circumstances while the vehicle is driven. A written agreement from the vehicle owner or the lessee is Malfunction diagnosis information obtained. from each on-vehicle computer. Officially requested by the police or Information related to controls of other law enforcement authorities. other on-vehicle computers. The recorded data may vary depending Used as a defense for FCA in a law on the vehicle grade and optional suit, claim, or arbitration. equipment. Voice and images are not recorded.

146 CONSTANT MONITORING The following components of the Air Bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system: Crash Sensors, And Diagnostic Module (Sas Unit) Front Air Bag Sensors Air Bag Modules Side Crash Sensors Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light Seat Belt Pretensioners Related Wiring With Passenger Occupant Classification System Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor Passenger Occupant Classification Module — If Equipped The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the ignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.

147 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTINGTHEENGINE...... 149 BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 150 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...... 152 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 153 SPORT MODE ...... 158 SPEED CONTROL ...... 159 RADAR SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 162 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ...... 163 PARKVIEW REAR BACKUP CAMERA STARTING AND OPERATING — IF EQUIPPED ...... 167 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 173 VEHICLELOADING...... 176 TOWING TRAILERS ...... 178 DRIVING TIPS ...... 178

148 STARTING THE Never press the accelerator pedal for 4. Place the start button in the ON ENGINE starting the engine. mode, push and release it as soon as the engine starts. If the engine does not Models Equipped With A Starting The Engine start within 10 seconds, push the start Manual Transmission Before starting the engine, adjust the button to OFF mode and wait for seat, the interior rear view mirrors, and Proceed as follows: 10-15 seconds before repeating the starting procedure. the door mirrors, and fasten the seat 1. Engage the parking brake and place belt correctly. the gear selector in NEUTRAL. Cold Weather Operation 2. Place the start button in the ACC Regarding Cold Start Disable Warning! mode. When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not 3. Fully depress the clutch pedal crank even when the engine starting without touching the accelerator. When leaving the vehicle, always remove procedure is performed. At this time, the key fob from the vehicle and lock your 4. Place the start button in the ON the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in vehicle. mode, push and release it as soon as the instrument cluster flashes. However, Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the engine starts. If the engine does not this does not indicate a problem. or with access to an unlocked vehicle. start within 10 seconds, push the start Perform the necessary procedures (see Allowing children to be in a vehicle button to OFF mode and wait for “Warning lights And Messages” unattended is dangerous for a number of 10-15 seconds before repeating the paragraph in “Getting To Know Your reasons. A child or others could be starting procedure. Instrument Panel” chapter). seriously or fatally injured. Children should Models Equipped With Regarding Ice Breaker be warned not to touch the parking brake, When the ambient temperature is low, brake pedal or the transmission gear An Automatic selector. Transmission the start of cranking may be delayed after engine starting procedure is Do not leave the key fob in or near the Proceed as follows: performed. At this time, the Cold Start vehicle, or in a location accessible to 1. Engage the parking brake and place Disable Indicator light in the instrument children, and do not leave the ignition of a cluster illumintes. However, this does vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless the gear selector to P (PARK) or N Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child (NEUTRAL). not indicate a problem. could operate power windows, other Refer to your authorized dealer controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal regarding other related parts which are without touching the accelerator. Do not leave children or animals inside to be input such as function name, parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat 3. Place the start button in the ACC operating scenario (condition) of each build-up may cause serious injury or death. mode. function, indicator operation, and user operation/procedure information.

149 Extended Park Starting After Starting — BRAKE SYSTEM Warming Up The Engine Note: Extended Park condition occurs This vehicle has power-assisted brakes when the vehicle has not been started Proceed as follows: that adjust automatically through or driven for at least 30 days. normal use. Should power-assist fail, 1. Travel slowly, letting the engine run you can stop by applying greater force 1. Install a battery charger or jumper at a reduced RPM, without accelerating than normal to the brake pedal. But the cables to the battery to ensure a full suddenly. battery charge during the crank cycle. distance required to stop will be greater 2. It is recommended to wait until the than usual. 2. Place the ignition in the START digital engine coolant temperature Note: Always depress the brake pedal mode and release it when the engine indicator starts moving before with the right foot. Applying the brakes starts. demanding full performance. with the unaccustomed left foot could 3. If the engine fails to start within Stopping The Engine slow your reaction time to an 10 seconds, place the ignition in the emergency situation resulting in STOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, wait five Proceed as follows: insufficient braking operation. seconds to allow the starter to cool, 1. Park the car in a position that is not Do not drive with your foot held on the then repeat the Extended Park Starting dangerous for oncoming traffic, if clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold the

STARTING AND OPERATING procedure. equipped with manual transmission clutch pedal depressed halfway place gear selector in FIRST (1st) or unnecessarily. Doing so could result in 4. If the engine fails to start after eight the following: attempts, allow the starter to cool for at REVERSE (R) gear, if equipped with least 10 minutes, then repeat the automatic transmission place the gear The clutch and brake parts will wear procedure. selector to PARK (P). out more quickly. 2. Push and release the ignition button The brakes can overheat and to STOP the engine. Caution! adversely affect brake performance.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

150 Releasing the Parking Brake Warning! Warning! Depress the brake pedal and pull the parking brake lever upwards, then press the release button. While holding Riding the brakes can lead to brake Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the button, lower the parking brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with or with access to an unlocked vehicle. lever all the way down to the released your foot resting or riding on the brake position. pedal can result in abnormally high brake Allowing children to be in a vehicle temperatures, excessive lining wear, and unattended is dangerous for a number of possible brake damage. You would not reasons. A child or others could be have your full braking capacity in an seriously or fatally injured. Children should emergency. be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on is dangerous. A Do not leave the key fob in or near the significant decrease in braking performance vehicle or in a location accessible to or vehicle stability during braking may children. A child could operate power occur. It will take you longer to stop the windows, other controls, or move the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to vehicle. control. You could have a collision. Have Be sure the park brake is fully the vehicle checked immediately. disengaged before driving; failure to do so 05050102-12A-001AB can lead to brake failure and a collision. Parking Brake Always fully apply the park brake when 1 — Parking Brake Lever Caution! leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and 2 — Parking Brake Release Button cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE Wear shoes appropriate for driving in order (R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to do so may Warning Light to avoid your shoe contacting the brake allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage The warning light turns on when the pedal when depressing the accelerator or injury. system has a malfunction. Refer to pedal. “Warning Lights And Messages” in Setting the Parking Brake “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Parking Brake Depress the brake pedal and then firmly Note: Driving with the parking brake on pull the parking brake lever fully will cause excessive wear of the brake upwards with sufficient force to hold the parts. vehicle in a stationary position.

151 Brake Pad Wear Indicator MANUAL When the disc brake pads become TRANSMISSION worn, the built-in wear indicators Manual Transmission contact the rotors. This causes a screeching noise to warn that the pads should be replaced. When you hear this noise contact your authorized dealer as Warning! soon as possible. Brake Assist You or others could be injured if you leave During emergency braking situations the vehicle unattended without having the when it is necessary to depress the park brake fully applied. The park brake 05987654-12A-001AB brake pedal with greater force, the should always be applied when the driver Gear Selector is not in the vehicle, especially on an brake assist system provides braking incline. Depress the clutch pedal all the way assistance, thus enhancing braking down while shifting, then release it performance. When the brake pedal is slowly. depressed hard or depressed more Your vehicle is equipped with a device quickly, the brakes apply more firmly. Caution! STARTING AND OPERATING to prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) by Note: mistake. Push the gear selector Never drive with your foot resting on the downward and shift to REVERSE (R). When the brake pedal is depressed clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle A natural driving posture can be hard or depressed more quickly, the on a hill with the clutch pedal partially achieved by lightly gripping the gear pedal will feel softer but the brakes will engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear selector from the side without having to on the clutch. apply more firmly. This is a normal rest your elbow on the center console. effect of the brake assist operation and does not indicate a malfunction. If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult, To engage the gears, press the clutch shift back into neutral, release the When the brake pedal is depressed pedal fully and put the gear selector clutch pedal, and try again. hard or depressed more quickly, a into the required position. The diagram motor/pump operation noise may be for gear engagement is shown on the heard. This is a normal effect of the knob. brake assist and does not indicate a malfunction. The brake assist equipment does not supersede the functionality of the vehicle's main braking system. 152 With Parking Sensor System AUTOMATIC When leaving the vehicle, always make When the gear selector is shifted to the TRANSMISSION — IF sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, REVERSE (R) position with the ignition EQUIPPED remove the key fob from the vehicle, and placed in the ON mode, the parking lock the vehicle. Shift Interlock sensor system is activated an audible Never leave children alone in a vehicle, sound is heard. This vehicle is equipped with an or with access to an unlocked vehicle. interlock system that holds the Allowing children to be in a vehicle transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unattended is dangerous for a number of Caution! unless the brakes are applied. To shift reasons. A child or others could be the transmission out of PARK (P), the seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN Keep your foot off the clutch pedal brake pedal or the transmission gear except when shifting gears. Also, do not mode (engine running or not) and the selector. use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an hill brake pedal must be pressed. Do not leave the key fob in or near the or grade. Riding the clutch will cause vehicle (or in a location accessible to needless clutch wear and damage. children), and do not leave the ignition in Do not apply any excessive lateral force Warning! the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could to the gear selector when changing from operate power windows, other controls, or fifth to fourth gear. This could lead to the move the vehicle. accidental selection of second gear, which It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or could result in damage to the transmission. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly Caution! Make sure the vehicle comes to a pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could complete stop before shifting to REVERSE accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. (R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the You could lose control of the vehicle and hit Damage to the transmission may occur if vehicle is still moving may damage the someone or something. Only shift into gear the following precautions are not observed: transmission. when the engine is idling normally and your Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Reverse can only be engaged when the only after the vehicle has come to a vehicle is completely stationary. With the Unintended movement of a vehicle complete stop. engine running, wait at least two seconds could injure those in or near the vehicle. As Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, with the clutch pedal fully pressed before with all vehicles, you should never exit a NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is engaging reverse to prevent damage to the vehicle while the engine is running. Before above idle speed. gears. exiting a vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, Before shifting into any gear, make sure and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. 153 The gear selector must be in PARK (P) inappropriate gear may be retained as or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter. the vehicle speed increases. If you Warning! The transmission gear selector has notice the engine speed going higher or PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N), hear the engine racing, confirm you DRIVE (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shift have not accidentally slipped into Never use the PARK position as a positions. manual shift mode (refer to “Manual substitute for the park brake. Always apply The transmission may be shifted freely Shift Mode” paragraph in this section). the park brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible from REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), to Shift Position Indication injury or damage. DRIVE (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–). The gear selector position (PRNDM) is Your vehicle could move and injure you illuminated when the ignition is placed and others if it is not in PARK. Check by in the ON mode. trying to move the gear selector out of Note: If one of the following actions is PARK with the brake pedal released. Make performed, the gear selector position is sure the transmission is in PARK before displayed for five minutes even if the leaving the vehicle. ignition is placed in a mode other than It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or ON. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly STARTING AND OPERATING The ignition is placed in the OFF pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could mode. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. The driver's door is opened. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear Gear Position Indication when the engine is idling normally and your In MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” of foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. the shift position indication illuminates Unintended movement of a vehicle and the number of the selected gear is could injure those in or near the vehicle. As displayed. with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before Gear Selector Positions exiting a vehicle, always apply the park PARK (P) brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition PARK (P) locks the transmission and 05210200-LHD12AT-001AB is in the OFF mode, the transmission is Gear Selector And Pattern prevents the driveshaft from rotating. locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Note: Even if you intend to use the When leaving the vehicle, always make automatic transmission functions as a sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, traditional automatic, you should also remove the key fob from the vehicle, and be aware that you can inadvertently lock the vehicle. shift into manual shift mode and an 154 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE Note: Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N) or with access to an unlocked vehicle. (R) when the engine is running faster when driving the vehicle. Doing so will Allowing children to be in a vehicle than idle can damage the damage the transmission. Press the unattended is dangerous for a number of transmission. parking brake or depress the brake reasons. A child or others could be pedal before moving the gear selector seriously or fatally injured. Children should from NEUTRAL (N) to prevent the REVERSE (R) be warned not to touch the park brake, vehicle from moving unexpectedly. brake pedal or the transmission gear This range is for moving the vehicle selector. backward. Shift into REVERSE only DRIVE (D) Do not leave the key fob in or near the after the vehicle has come to a DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position. vehicle (or in a location accessible to complete stop. From a stop, the transmission will children), and do not leave the ignition in With Parking Sensor system: when automatically shift through all available the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could the gear selector is shifted to the gears. operate power windows, other controls, or REVERSE (R) position with the ignition move the vehicle. MANUAL (M) placed in the ON mode, the parking MANUAL (M) is the manual shift mode sensor system is activated and an position. Gears can be shifted up or audible sound is heard. Caution! down by operating the gear selector. NEUTRAL (N) (Refer to “Manual Shift Mode” In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels and paragraph in this section). Before moving the transmission gear transmission are not locked. The vehicle selector out of PARK, you must place the will roll freely even on the slightest ignition from the LOCK/OFF mode to the incline unless the parking brake or Warning! ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake brakes are applied. pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive DO NOT race the engine when shifting Warning! wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear could skid, causing a collision or personal range, as this can damage the drivetrain. injury. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn Note: off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL response to changing traffic or road (N) or REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is conditions. You might lose control of the moving can damage your vehicle and have a collision. transmission.

155 Active Adaptive Shift When the ignition is in the ACC or OFF 3. Push and hold the lock release (AAS) mode, the gear selector cannot be button on the gear selector and move Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) shifted from PARK (P). the gear selector. automatically controls the transmission The ignition cannot be placed in the 4. Take the vehicle to an authorized shift points to best suit the road OFF mode if the gear selector is not in dealer. conditions and driver input. This PARK (P). improves driving feel. For Some Models Shift Lock Override The transmission may switch to AAS Proceed as follows: mode when driving up and down If the gear selector will not move from 1. Push the lock release button on the slopes, cornering, driving at high PARK (P) using the proper shift gear selector while also pushing down elevations, or depressing the procedure, continue to press the brake on the Shift Lock Override button. accelerator pedal quickly while the gear pedal and proceed as follows: selector is in the DRIVE (D) position. 1. Remove the shift lock override cover 2. Move the gear selector. Depending on the road and driving using a cloth wrapped flat head 3. Take the vehicle to an authorized conditions/vehicle operations, gear screwdriver. dealer. shifting could be delayed or not occur, however, this does not indicate a 2. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool STARTING AND OPERATING problem because the AAS mode will into the Override Access Hole, and maintain the optimum gear position. push the override button down. Shift-Lock System The shift-lock system prevents shifting out of PARK (P) unless the brake pedal is depressed. To shift from PARK (P): 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 005210206-122-001 2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN Shift Lock Override mode. 3. Press and hold the lock-release 05210206-12A-002 Shift Lock Override Access Hole button on the gear selector. 4. Move the gear selector.

156 Manual Shift Mode Indicators Manually Shifting Up/Down The manual shift mode gives you the Manual Shift Mode Indication To shift up to a higher gear, tap the gear selector rearward once (or tap the feel of driving a manual transmission In manual shift mode, the “M” of the [+] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if vehicle by allowing you to operate the shift position indication in the equipped). gear selector manually. instrument panel illuminates. This allows you to control engine rpm To shift down to a lower gear, tap the Gear Position Indication and torque to the drive wheels much gear selector forward once (or tap the like a manual transmission when more The numeral for the selected gear [-] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if control is desired. illuminates. equipped). To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode, Note: shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to MANUAL (M). To return to automatic If a requested downshift would shift mode, shift the gear selector from cause the engine to over-speed, that MANUAL (M) to DRIVE (D). shift will not occur. You can shift between DRIVE (D) and The system will ignore attempts to MANUAL (M) mode at any time, without upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. taking your foot off the accelerator. Do not drive the vehicle with the Note: tachometer needle in the red zone while in manual shift mode. If you change to manual shift mode 05210207-12A-002AB when the vehicle is stopped, the gear Instrument Panel During deceleration, the will shift to M1. transmission may automatically shift 1 — Manual Shift Mode Indication down depending on vehicle speed. If you change to manual shift mode 2 — Gear Position Indication while the vehicle is moving it will remain You can start out, from a stop, in in the current gear until a manual shift first or second gear. Tapping the gear request is made. selector rearward (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

157 Paddle Mode — If While the gear selector is in the SPORT MODE Equipped MANUAL (M) position and the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is turned off, The Sport mode increases steering Tapping one of the steering manual shift mode does not switch to feedback to the driver with slight wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if automatic shift mode even if the increase in effort and changes the equipped, while the gear selector is in accelerator pedal is completely transmission shift schedules for more DRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a pressed. Tap the gear selector forward aggressive shifting. This driving mode is temporary manual mode). The current or rearward to select the appropriate useful while driving on twisty roads gear will be displayed in the instrument gear. where more steering precision is cluster, with the "M" also illuminated. desired in spirited cornering. The transmission will revert back to Climbing steep grades from a stop To activate Sport mode, toggle the normal operation (if the gear selector To climb a steep grade from a stopped Sport Mode button forward and hold for remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, position: approximately 2 seconds. You will see depending on accelerator pedal activity. “Sport” illuminate in the Instrument 1. Press the brake pedal. Note: Because Paddle mode is only Panel cluster. temporary, use of the MANUAL (M) 2. Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, depending position is recommended if you need to on the load weight and grade drive the vehicle in a particular gear for steepness. STARTING AND OPERATING long periods. 3. Release the brake pedal while Driving Tips gradually accelerating. Overtaking Descending steep grades For extra power when passing another When descending a steep grade, shift vehicle or climbing steep grades, press to lower gears, depending on load the accelerator fully. The transmission weight and grade steepness. will shift to a lower gear, depending on Descend slowly, using the brakes only vehicle speed. 05210101-12A-001AB occasionally to prevent them from SPORT Button Note: overheating. The accelerator pedal may initially feel heavy as it is being pressed, then feel lighter as it is pressed further. This change in pedal force controls whether or not kickdown should be performed.

158 SPEED CONTROL Activation / Deactivation Speed Control Note: When the ignition is placed in This is an electronically controlled the OFF position, the system status driving assistance feature that allows before it was turned off is stored. For the desired vehicle speed to be example, if the ignition is placed in the maintained, without having to press the OFF position while the Speed Control is accelerator pedal. operating, the system will be operable This feature can be used at a speed when the ignition is placed in the ON above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long position the next time. stretches of dry, straight roads with few Activating Speed Control variations (e.g. motorways). Push the ON button located on the It is therefore not recommended to use right side of the steering wheel with the this feature on city roads with traffic. Do other Speed Control buttons. The not use it in town. warning light (amber) in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Warning!

Do not use Speed Control under the 05100101-877-877AB following conditions: Speed Control Buttons hilly terrain steep inclines Warning! heavy or unsteady traffic slippery or winding roads Leaving the Speed Control system on similar restrictions that require when not in use is dangerous. You could inconsistent speed accidentally set the system or cause it to Using the Speed Control under the go faster than you want. You could lose following conditions is dangerous and control and have an accident. Always leave could result in loss of vehicle control. the system off when you are not using it.

159 Deactivating Speed Control Automatic transmission: the gear The vehicle’s set speed is displayed in Push the OFF/CAN button. The selector is in the PARK or NEUTRAL the instrument cluster. position. warning light (amber) in the Increasing Speed instrument cluster turns off. Manual transmission: the gear To increase speed using the Speed When a speed has been set:the selector is in the NEUTRAL position or Control buttons: warning light (green) in the when the clutch is disengaged (clutch instrument cluster is illuminated, push is depressed). Push the RES (+) button and hold it, and hold the OFF/CAN button or push The parking brake is applied. your vehicle will accelerate. Release the the OFF/CAN button twice to button at the desired speed. deactivate. Release the SET (-) button at the When a speed has not been set:the desired speed, otherwise the speed will Push the RES (+) button and release warning light (amber) in the continue decreasing while the SET (-) it immediately, to adjust the set speed. instrument cluster is illuminated, push button is pushed and held (except Multiple pushes of the button will the OFF/CAN button to deactivate. when the accelerator pedal is increase the set speed according to the depressed). Setting A Desired Speed number of times it is pushed. Note: Increasing speed with a single RES Proceed as follows: STARTING AND OPERATING Release the SET (-) button at the (+) button operation: 1. Activate the Speed Control device desired speed, otherwise the speed If the instrument cluster display for by pushing the ON button. The cruise will continue decreasing while the SET vehicle speed is indicated in mph: warning light (amber) illuminates. (-) button is pushed and held (except speed will increase in 1 mph when the accelerator pedal is 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, increments. depressed). which must be more than 25 mph If the instrument cluster display for (40 km/h). On a steep grade, the vehicle may vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: momentarily slow down while 3. Set the Speed Control by pushing speed will increase in 1 km/h ascending, or speed up while increments. the SET (-) button at the desired speed. descending. The Speed Control is set at the To increase speed using moment the SET (-) button is pushed. The Speed Control will cancel if the accelerator pedal: Release the accelerator pedal vehicle speed decreases below Press the accelerator pedal to simultaneously. The warning light 16 mph (25 km/h) when climbing a accelerate to the desired speed. (green) illuminates. steep incline. Push the SET (-) button and release it Note: The Speed Control setting The Speed Control may cancel at cannot be performed under the immediately. This new set speed will be about 9 mph (15 km/h) below the saved. following conditions: preset speed such as when climbing a long, steep incline. 160 Note: Accelerate the vehicle to speed Resume Speed Push OFF/CAN button. up temporarily with the accelerator If any other method besides the If the RES (+) button is pushed when pedal when the Speed Control is on. OFF/CAN button was used to cancel the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) Increasing the speed will not interfere cruising speed (such as applying the or higher, the system reverts to the with, or change the set speed. Take brake pedal or pressing in the clutch previously set speed. your foot off the accelerator to return to pedal) and the system is still activated, Note: If any of the following conditions the set speed. the most recent set speed will occur, the Speed Control system is Decreasing Speed automatically resume when the RES (+) temporarily canceled: button is pushed. To decrease speed using the Speed The parking brake is applied. Control buttons: If vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h), increase the vehicle speed Automatic Transmission: the Push the SET (-) button and hold it, up to 16 mph (25 km/h) or more and gear selector is in the PARK or the vehicle will gradually slow down. push RES (+) button. NEUTRAL position. Release the button at the desired Temporarily Canceling Manual Transmission: the gear speed. The System selector is in the NEUTRAL position. Push the SET (-) button and release Automatic Transmission: the it immediately to adjust the set speed. Speed Control cannot be canceled Warning! Multiple button pushes will decrease while driving in manual mode (gear the set speed according to the number selector shifted from D to M position). of times it is pushed. Leaving the Speed Control system on Therefore, engine braking will not be when not in use is dangerous. You could applied even if the transmission is Decreasing speed with a single SET accidentally set the system or cause it to shifted down to a lower gear. If (-) button operation: go faster than you want. You could lose deceleration is required, lower the set If the instrument cluster display for control and have an accident. Always leave speed or press the brake pedal. vehicle speed is indicated in mph: the the system OFF when you are not using it. When the Speed Control system is speed will decrease in 1 mph temporarily canceled, the speed cannot increments. To temporarily cancel the system, use be reset. one of these methods: If the instrument cluster display for vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: the Slightly press the brake pedal. speed will decrease in 1 km/h Press the clutch pedal (if equipped increments. with a manual transmission).

161 RADAR SENSORS — Vehicles are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors adjusted for each IF EQUIPPED Caution! vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so Rear Radar Sensors that the radar sensors detect The following systems use the rear If the rear bumper receives a severe approaching vehicles correctly. If the radar sensors: impact, the system may no longer operate direction of the radar sensors has normally. Stop the system immediately and changed, contact an authorized dealer. Blind Spot Monitoring System (BSM) contact an authorized dealer. The radar sensors are regulated by the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) relevant radio wave laws of the country The radar sensors function by detecting The detection ability of the radar in which the vehicle is driven. If the the radio waves reflected off of a vehicle sensors has limitations. In the following vehicle is driven abroad, authorization approaching from the rear, or an cases, the detection ability may be from the country in which the vehicle is obstruction, sent from the radar sensor. decreased, and the system may not driven may be required. operate normally: The radar sensors are installed inside Note: the rear bumper, one each on the left The rear bumper near the radar For repairs or replacement of the and right sides. sensors has been damaged. radar sensors, bumper repairs, paint

STARTING AND OPERATING Snow, ice or mud has adhered to the work, or replacement near the radar radar sensors on the rear bumper. sensors, consult an authorized dealer. Operating in weather conditions such Turn off the radar system when as rain, snow and fog. pulling a trailer or while an accessory, Note: Under the following conditions, such as a bicycle carrier, is installed to the radar sensors cannot detect objects the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the or it may be difficult to detect them: radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not Stationary objects on a road or a operate normally. road side such as small, two-wheeled 07080915112112 vehicles, bicycles, pedestrians, Radar Sensor Locations animals, and shopping carts. Always keep the surface of the rear Vehicle shapes which do not reflect bumper near the radar sensors clean so radar waves well such as empty trailers that the radar sensors operate normally. with a low vehicle height and sports Also, do not apply items such as cars. stickers.

162 REAR PARK ASSIST The Rear Park Assist System uses four The system may not operate — IF EQUIPPED ultrasonic sensors (two rear sensors normally under the following and two rear corner sensors) to detect conditions: Rear Park Assist obstructions around the vehicle while Mud, ice, or snow adhered to the parking the vehicle in a garage or sensor area (operation will return to during parallel parking when the gear Warning! normal when removed). selector is in REVERSE. The system is equipped with an assist The sensor area is frozen (operation Do not rely completely on the parking device to notify the driver of the will return to normal when the ice is sensor system and be sure to confirm the approximate distance from the vehicle thawed). safety around your vehicle visually when to the surrounding obstruction using a The sensor is covered by a hand or driving. This system can assist the driver in audible alert. operating the vehicle in the forward and excessive force has been applied to backward directions while parking. The the bumper. detection ranges of the sensors are limited, The vehicle is on a steep incline. therefore, driving the vehicle while relying only on the system may cause an accident. Under extremely hot or cold Always confirm the safety around your weather conditions. vehicle visually when driving. The vehicle is driven on bumps, Parking and other potentially dangerous inclines, gravel, or grass covered maneuvers are, however, always the driver’s responsibility. When performing roads. these operations, always make sure that Anything which generates there are no other people (especially ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as children) or animals on the route you want 05200100-121-001AB another vehicle's horn, the engine to drive into. The parking sensors are an Parking Sensor Locations aid for the driver, but the driver must never sound of a motorcycle, the air brakes allow their attention to lapse during Note: of a large-sized vehicle, or another potentially dangerous maneuvers, even Do not install any accessories within vehicle's sensors. those executed at low speeds. the detection ranges of the sensors. It The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or may affect the system operation. in road conditions causing water Depending on the type of splash. obstruction and the surrounding A antenna for a radio transmitter is conditions, the detection range of a installed to the vehicle. sensor may narrow, or the sensors may not be able to detect obstructions. 163 The vehicle is moving towards a tall The system may have a malfunction Sensor Detection Range or square curbstone. if the audible signal does not operate. The sensors detect obstructions within Contact an authorized dealer. An obstruction is too close to the the following range: sensor. The beeper which indicates a Lateral Detection Range: system malfunction may not be heard The following types of obstructions 19 inches (50 cm) if the ambient temperature is extremely may not be detected: cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to Rear Detection Range: 59 inches Thin objects such as wire or rope. the sensor area. Remove any foreign (150 cm) material from the sensor area. Things which absorb sonic waves System Operation easily such as rain or snow. When installing a trailer hitch, The system is operational when the contact an authorized dealer. Angular shaped objects. ignition is in the ON position and the gear selector is shifted to REVERSE. Very tall objects, and those which When an audible signal sounds, the arewideatthetop. Caution! system is enabled for use. Small, short objects. Only have repairs on the bumper in the

STARTING AND OPERATING Obstructions under the bumper area of the sensors carried out by a may not be detected. Obstructions authorized dealer. Repairs on the bumper that are lower than the bumper or thin that are not carried out properly may which may have been initially detected compromise the operation of the parking but are no longer detected as the sensors. vehicle approaches more closely. Only have the bumpers repainted or any Always have the system inspected retouches to the paint work in the area of by an authorized dealer if any force is the sensors carried out by a authorized applied to the bumpers, even in a dealer. Incorrect paint application could minor accident. If the sensors have affect the operation of the parking sensors. been repositioned in any way, they cannot detect obstructions.

164 Parking Sensor Audible Alert The audible alert will sound while the system is operating according to the following chart: Rear Sensor

Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (*) Obstruction Farthest distance Approx. 59 - 23 inches (150 cm - 60 cm) Slow intermittent sound Far distance Approx. 23 -17 inches (60 - 45 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 17 -13 inches (45 - 35 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 13 inches (35 cm) Continuous sound (*) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Rear Corner Sensor

Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (**) Obstruction Far distance Approx. 19 - 14 inches (50 - 38 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 14 - 9.8 inches (38 - 25 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 9.8 inches (25 cm) Continuous sound (**) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Note: If an obstruction is detected in a zone for six seconds or more, the audible alert stops, unless the obstruction is within the close distance zone. If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the corresponding audible alert is heard.

165 When A Warning Alert Is Activated The system notifies the driver of an obstacle by activating the audible alert.

Beep How To Check The system may have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as The audible alert is not heard. possible. When the engine is turned ON, or if the parking sensor Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system continues to sound detects a problem while driving, an intermittent audible the audible alert, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. alert is heard one to four times(*). ( * ) The number of times the audible alert is heard changes depending on the malfunction location. STARTING AND OPERATING

166 PARKVIEW REAR When the display is cold, the When snow chains are mounted or the BACKUP CAMERA — images could be more blurred than temporary space saver spare wheel is IF EQUIPPED usual, making it difficult to check the fitted. conditions of the area around the Operation vehicle. Always use extreme caution The rear trunk is not completely closed. The camera is located on the trunk lid, and verify the real conditions of the The vehicle is on a sloping road. above the license plate. area behind the vehicle with you own Using the rear-view monitor under the eyes. conditions listed above is dangerous and If water, snow, or mud is deposited can cause damage to persons and/or the on the camera lens, clean it with a soft vehicle. cloth. If this does not clean it, use a mild detergent. Caution! If the camera is subjected to abrupt temperature changes (from hot to cold or vice versa), the rear-view monitor Do not apply excessive force to the may not work properly. camera. You could alter the position and angle of the camera. Do not disassemble, When replacing tires, contact an modify or remove it as this could 07040110-124-008AB authorized dealer. Replacing the tires Rear Camera Location compromise the seal. can cause the guide lines that appear Switching The Display To Rear View on the display to be misaligned. The camera’s cover is made of plastic. Camera Mode: Do not apply degreasers, organic solvents, wax or glass polish to the camera’s cover. Place the gear selector in the REVERSE Warning! If some substance ends up on the cover, position, after the ignition is turned to clean it off immediately with a soft cloth. ON, to switch the display to rear-view Do not rub the cover too much, nor camera mode. Always use extreme caution and verify polish it with abrasive compounds or hard the real conditions of the area behind the brushes. The cover could be damaged and Note: vehicle. Backing up while looking only at create image problems. When the gear selector is moved the screen is dangerous and can lead to an from the REVERSE position and put in accident or collision with an object. The If the vehicle has been involved in a rear-view monitor is simply a system to aid any other position, the screen returns frontal, lateral or rear collision, the rear reversing. The view on the display can parking camera’s alignment (location or to the previous display mode. show a situation that differs from the real installation angle) may have been altered. When parking in REVERSE, take one. Contact a authorized dealer. care over obstacles that may be above Do not use the rear-view monitor under If the display shows "no video signal", or under the camera’s display range. the following conditions: there may be a problem with the camera. Roads covered in ice or snow. Contact an authorized dealer. 167 Display Note: If it is difficult to see the display Note: The images on the display can under the following conditions, it does show a situation that differs from the not mean that there is a malfunction: actual view. In dark areas. When the temperature around the lens is particularly high or low. When the camera is wet from rain or due to a high atmospheric humidity. When there is some foreign deposit around the camera, such as mud. When the camera lens reflects sunlight or a headlight beam.

07080913987987 The image on the display may be Camera View delayed if the temperature around the

STARTING AND OPERATING 1—BlockedArea camera is low. 2 — Rear Bumper

Caution! The field of view varies depending on 07080913988988 the vehicle and the road conditions. The Camera Field Of View field of view is limited. Objects below The distance displayed by the camera To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView the bumper or around it’s sides may not view differs from the actual view, as the should only be used as a parking aid. The be displayed. rear parking camera is equipped with a ParkView camera is unable to view every special lens. obstacle or object in your drive path. The camera could capture any To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle non-standard accessories installed on must be driven slowly when using ParkView the vehicle. Do not install non-standard to be able to stop in time when an obstacle accessories that could interfere with the is seen. It is recommended that the driver camera’s view, such as lights or look frequently over his/her shoulder when reflectors. using ParkView.

168 Looking At The Display The vehicle width guide lines are Warning! displayed on the screen as a reference to show the width of the vehicle compared to the width of the parking Drivers must be careful when backing up space to be entered while in REVERSE. even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind Vehicle Width Guide Lines: these your vehicle, and be sure to check for guide lines serve as a reference pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, showing the width of the vehicle. obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of Distance Guide Lines: these lines your surroundings and must continue to indicate the approximate distance from pay attention while backing up. Failure to the rear of the vehicle (the rear edge of do so can result in serious injury or death. the bumper). The red and yellow lines indicates the points at about 19 inches Rear View Camera (50 cm), for the red line and 39 inches Operation (1 m) for the yellow line, from the rear bumper (central point of each line). The operating modes of the rear view camera when the vehicle is in REVERSE vary depending on traffic, road, and vehicle conditions. Also, the 07080913989989 amount of turning and the duration of Entering Parking Spot the maneuver vary depending on the conditions. Therefore, it is important to A — Rear Camera View check the surrounding conditions and B — Check Surrounding Area adapt the steering as necessary. Note: The images from the rear 3. Once the vehicle starts to enter the parking camera shown on the monitor parking space, proceed slowly in are reversed (mirror image). REVERSE while keeping the vehicle 07080913-111-111 width guide lines away from the two 1. Place the gear selector in the Vehicle Width Guide Lines sides of the parking space. REVERSE position to switch the display to rear view camera mode. 4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines 2. Check the surrounding conditions are parallel with the two sides of the and begin backing up. parking space. 169 5. Once the guide lines are parallel, 6. When the gear selector is moved When The Vehicle Slopes Due To straighten the steering wheel and from the REVERSE position and put in The Weight Of Passengers And reverse slowly into the parking space. any other position, the screen returns to Load: Continue to check the vehicle’s the previous display mode. When the vehicle is rear heavy, the surroundings and stop in the best object on the screen seems to be position possible (if the parking space Note: further away than it really is. has dividing lines, check that the vehicle Since there may be some width guide lines are parallel with them). differences between the displayed image and the real conditions, always visually inspect the area behind the vehicle, and the surrounding areas, to make sure they are completely clear. In the image of the parking space (or garage) shown above, the rear of the vehicle and the distance guide lines may seem parallel on the monitor, but may not be when the parked vehicle is STARTING AND OPERATING inspected. 07080913991991 Loaded Vehicle Camera Angle When you enter a parking space with a dividing line only on one side, 1 — Object 2 — Variance the dividing line and the vehicle width guide lines may appear parallel on the monitor, but may not be when the parked vehicle is inspected. Road Conditions And Displayed Image There are some differences between 07080913990990 what is shown on the display, and the Entering Parking Spot actual road conditions. A — Rear Camera View The different perceptions of distance B — Check Surrounding Area could lead to an accident. The conditions that can lead to the different perceptions of distance, listed below, must be taken into consideration: 170 When The Road Behind The Vehicle Slopes Steeply: When the vehicle is on a steep uphill (downhill) slope, the object on the screen seems to be further away than it really is.

07080913993993 Downgrade Camera Angle 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And Object Displayed On The Screen 2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve- hicle And Object

07080913992992 3 — Appears Closer Than Actual Di- Downhill Camera Angle stance 4 — Object On Screen 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And 5 — Object At Actual Position Object Displayed On The Screen 07080913994994 2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve- Three-Dimensional Object Camera hicle And Object Three Dimensional Object Behind View The Vehicle: 3 — Appears Farther Than Actual Di- A—ObjectInView stance Since the distance guide line display is B — Actual Distance To Object 4 — Object At Actual Position based on a flat surface, the distance to C — Appears Farther Than Actual 5 — Object On Screen a three dimensional object on the screen differs from the actual distance.

171 Adjusting The Image Quality Warning! The image quality can be adjusted with the gear selector in the REVERSE position. Adjusting the rear-view camera image quality must always be done when the Four adjustments can be made: vehicle is stationary. Do not adjust the brightness, contrast, tint and color. Give rear-view camera image quality while attention to the vehicle’s surroundings vehicle driving. Adjusting the image quality while making adjustments: (brightness, contrast, color and tint) of the rear-view camera while driving the vehicle

1. Select the icon on the top left of the 07080914-111-111 is dangerous since it could distract the screen to display the tabs. Image Quality Adjustments driver and cause a serious accident. 2. Select the desired tab. 3. Use the cursor to adjust the brightness, contrast, tint and color. If a reset is needed, press the reset button. STARTING AND OPERATING 4. Select the icon on the top left of the screen to close the tabs.

172 REFUELING THE knocking sound, see your authorized Reformulated gasoline contains VEHICLE dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with oxygenates and are specifically blended an octane number lower than 87 can to reduce vehicle emissions and Refueling The Vehicle cause engine failure and may void or improve air quality. Stop the engine before refueling. not be covered by the New Vehicle The use of reformulated gasoline is Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline recommended. Properly blended Fuel Requirements can cause problems such as hard reformulated gasoline will provide Vehicles with catalytic converters or starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you improved performance and durability of oxygen sensors must use ONLY experience these symptoms, try engine and fuel system components. UNLEADED FUEL, which will reduce another brand of gasoline before exhaust emissions and keep spark plug considering service for the vehicle. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends fouling to a minimum. Gasoline blended with oxygenates such Fuel: Premium unleaded fuel. as alcohol or ether compounds are Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded Octane Rating generally referred to as oxygenated gasoline with oxygenates such as (Anti-knock index): 91 fuels. ethanol. (R + M)/2 method or The common gasoline blend that can above (96 RON or be used with your vehicle is ethanol above) (U.S. federal blended at no more than 15%. Gasoline Caution! law requires that containing alcohol, such as ethanol or octane ratings be posted on gasoline methanol, may be marketed under the station pumps). name "Gasohol". DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol Regular unleaded fuel with an octane Vehicle damage and problems resulting or gasoline containing more than 15% rating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON) can ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may from the use of the following may not result in starting and drivability problems, be used, but this will reduce be covered by the New Vehicle Limited damage critical fuel system components, performance slightly, such as reduced Warranty: cause emissions to exceed the applicable engine output, and engine knocking. Alcohol containing more than 15% standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane ethanol. (91 RON) will negatively affect the observe pump labels as they should clearly emission control system performance Gasoline or alcohol containing communicate if a fuel contains greater than and could also cause engine knocking methanol. 15% ethanol (E-15). and serious engine damage. Leaded fuel or leaded alcohol. While operating on gasoline with an Problems that result from using octane number of 87, hearing a light Reformulated Gasoline gasoline containing more than 15% knocking sound from the engine is not Many areas of the country require the ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing a cause for concern. However, if the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred methanol are not the responsibility of engine is heard making a heavy to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. the manufacturer and may void or not 173 be covered under New Vehicle Limited MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT Fuel System Cautions Warranty. content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; E-85 Usage In Non-Flex therefore, you should ask your gasoline Caution! Fuel Vehicles retailer whether the gasoline contains Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Follow these guidelines to maintain your compatible with gasoline containing up California reformulated gasoline. vehicle’s performance: to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with Materials Added To Fuel The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited higher ethanol content may void the by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Besides using unleaded gasoline with impair engine performance and damage If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently the proper octane rating, gasolines that the emissions control system. fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or have some or all of these symptoms: ignition malfunctions can cause the Using gasolines that have these Operate in a lean mode. catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice additives will help improve fuel a pungent burning odor or some light OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” economy, reduce emissions, and smoke, your engine may be out of tune or on. maintain vehicle performance. malfunctioning and may require immediate

STARTING AND OPERATING Designated TOP TIER service. Contact your authorized dealer for Poor engine performance. Detergent Gasoline service assistance. Poor cold start and cold drivability. contains a higher level The use of fuel additives, which are now of detergents to further Increased risk for fuel system being sold as octane enhancers, is not aide in minimizing recommended. Most of these products component corrosion. engine and fuel system contain high concentrations of methanol. MMT In Gasoline deposits. When available, the usage of Fuel system damage or vehicle Top Tier Detergent gasoline is performance problems resulting from the Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese recommended. Visit use of such fuels or additives is not the Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- responsibility of the manufacturer and may www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP containing metallic additive that is void or not be covered under the New TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. blended into some gasoline to increase Vehicle Limited Warranty. octane. Gasoline blended with MMT Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. provides no performance advantage Note: Intentional tampering with the Many of these materials intended for beyond gasoline of the same octane emissions control system can result in gum and varnish removal may contain number without MMT. Gasoline blended civil penalties being assessed against active solvents or similar ingredients. with MMT reduces spark plug life and you. reduces emissions system performance These can harm fuel system gasket and in some vehicles. The manufacturer diaphragm materials. recommends that gasoline without 174 Carbon Monoxide When the fuel filler door end is pressed Warnings with the doors unlocked, the fuel filler door rises. Warning!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the 04040202-12A-001AB engine in a closed area, such as a garage, Fuel Filler Cap and never sit in a parked vehicle with the To close the fuel filler cap, turn it engine running for an extended period. If 04040201-12A-002AB clockwise until a click is heard. the vehicle is stopped in an open area with Fuel Filler Door the engine running for more than a short The fuel filler door operates in period, adjust the ventilation system to Warning! force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. conjunction with the door locking/unlocking mechanism. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust To close, press the fuel filler door until a Never have any smoking materials lit in system inspected every time the vehicle is click sound is heard. or near the vehicle when the gas cap is raised. Have any abnormal conditions removed or the tank is being filled. repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with Note: Never add fuel when the engine is all side windows fully open. Make sure to lock both the doors running. This is in violation of most state when leaving the vehicle. and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. Refueling Procedure Lock the doors after closing the fuel Fuel Filler Door filler door. If the fuel filler door is closed A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a Note: Always use only a designated after locking the doors, the fuel filler door cannot be locked. vehicle. You could be burned. Always place FCA fuel filler cap or an approved gas containers on the ground while filling. equivalent, available at your authorized Fuel Filler Cap dealer. The wrong cap can result in a To remove the fuel filler cap, turn it serious malfunction of the fuel and counterclockwise. Attach the removed emission control systems. cap to the inner side of the fuel filler door.

175 Do not apply any object/plug to the end VEHICLE LOADING of the filler which is not provided for the Certification Label vehicle. The use of non-compliant objects/plugs could cause a pressure As required by National Highway Traffic increase inside the tank, resulting in Safety Administration regulations, your dangerous situations. vehicle has a certification label affixed to Do not use a mobile phone near the the driver's side door or pillar. refueling pump: risk of fire. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Emergency Fuel Filler Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Door Release 08100100-121-002 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A If the battery is discharged, the fuel filler Trunk Interior Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is door cannot be opened. In this case, 1 — Plastic Fasteners included on this label and indicates the the fuel filler door can be opened by 2 — Cover Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. taking care of the discharged battery The bar code that appears on the situation. 2. Partially peel back the cover inside bottom of the label is your VIN.

STARTING AND OPERATING If the fuel filler door cannot be opened the trunk, then pull the emergency even if the discharged battery situation Gross Vehicle Weight Rating release lever. has been resolved, the electrical system (GVWR) may have a malfunction. In this case, the fuel filler door can be The GVWR is the total permissible opened using the following procedure weight of your vehicle including driver, as an emergency measure: passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum 1. Open the trunk and pull the center capacities of front and rear axle section of the plastic fastener and systems (GAWR). Total load must be remove the fastener. limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. Payload 08100100-122-001 Fuel Door Emergency Release The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can 3 — Emergency Release Lever carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

176 Gross Axle Weight Rating Inflation Pressure limitations are met. Store the heavier (GAWR) items down low and be sure that the This is the cold tire inflation pressure for weight is distributed equally. Stow all The GAWR is the maximum permissible your vehicle for all loading conditions up loose items securely before driving. to full GAWR. load on the front and rear axles. The Improper weight distributions can have load must be distributed in the cargo Curb Weight an adverse effect on the way your area so that the GAWR of each axle is vehicle steers and handles and the way not exceeded. The curb weight of a vehicle is defined the brakes operate. Each axle GAWR is determined by the as the total weight of the vehicle with all components in the system with the fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full lowest load carrying capacity (axle, capacity conditions, and with no Caution! springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles occupants or cargo loaded into the or suspension components sometimes vehicle. The front and rear curb weight specified by purchasers for increased values are determined by weighing your Do not load your vehicle any heavier than vehicle on a commercial scale before the GVWR or the maximum front and rear durability does not necessarily increase GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can the vehicle's GVWR. any occupants or cargo are added. break, or it can change the way your Loading vehicle handles. This could cause you to Tire Size lose control. Also overloading can shorten The tire size on the Vehicle Certification The actual total weight and the weight the life of your vehicle. Label represents the actual tire size on of the front and rear of your vehicle at your vehicle. Replacement tires must be the ground can best be determined by equal to the load capacity of this tire weighing it when it is loaded and ready size. for operation. The entire vehicle should first be Rim Size weighed on a commercial scale to This is the rim size that is appropriate insure that the GVWR has not been for the tire size listed. exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight 177 TOWING TRAILERS DRIVING TIPS Follow the maintenance schedule and contact your authorized dealer. Trailer Towing Engine Break-In Recommendation Use the air conditioner only when Your car is not designed for towing. necessary. No special break-in is necessary, but a Recreational Towing few precautions in the first 620 miles Slow down on rough roads. An example of "recreational towing" is (1000 km) may add to the performance, Keep the tires properly inflated. towing your vehicle behind a economy, and life of the vehicle: motorhome. Do not carry unnecessary weight. The transmission is not designed for Do not race the engine. Do not rest your foot on the brake towing this vehicle on all four wheels. Do not maintain one constant speed, pedal while driving. either slow or fast, for a long period of time. Keep the wheels in correct Caution! alignment. Do not drive constantly at full-throttle or high engine rpm for extended Keep windows closed at high DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to periods of time. speeds. the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle

STARTING AND OPERATING requires towing, make sure the drive Avoid unnecessary hard stops. Slow down when driving in crosswinds and headwinds. wheels are OFF the ground. Avoid full-throttle starts. Hazardous Driving Towing this vehicle in violation of the Saving Fuel And above requirements can cause severe Protection Of The When driving on ice or in water, snow, transmission damage. Damage from mud, sand, or similar hazards: improper towing is not covered under the Environment New Vehicle Limited Warranty. How you operate your vehicle Be cautious and allow extra distance determines how far it will travel on a for braking. tank of fuel. Avoid sudden braking and sudden Use these suggestions to help save fuel maneuvering. andreduceCO : 2 Do not pump the brakes. Continue to Avoid long warm-ups. Once the press down on the brake pedal. engine runs smoothly, begin driving. If you get stuck, select a lower gear Avoid fast starts. and accelerate slowly. Do not spin the Drive at lower speeds. rear wheels. Anticipate when to apply the brakes (avoid sudden braking). 178 For more traction in starting on ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat slippery surfaces such as ice or packed Warning! on the passenger’s side floor area. snow, use sand, rock salt, chains, carpeting, or other nonslip material ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall under the rear wheels. or slide into the driver’s side floor area An improperly attached, damaged, folded, when the vehicle is moving. Objects can Note: Use snow chains only on the or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat become trapped under accelerator, brake, rear wheels. fasteners may cause your floor mat to or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of interfere with the accelerator, brake, or vehicle control. Floor Mat Safety clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle Information control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or NEVER place any objects under the floor DEATH: mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects Always use floor mats designed to fit ALWAYS securely attach your floor could change the position of the floor mat the footwell of your vehicle. Use only mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT and may cause interference with the floor mats that leave the pedal area install your floor mat upside down or turn accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. unobstructed and that are firmly your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm If the vehicle carpet has been removed secured so that they cannot slip out of mat is secured using the floor mat and re-installed, always properly attach position and interfere with the pedals or fasteners on a regular basis. carpet to the floor and check the floor mat impair safe operation of your vehicle in ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. other ways. FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE Fully depress each pedal to check for before installing any other floor mat. interference with the accelerator, brake, or NEVER install or stack an additional floor clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. mat on top of an existing floor mat. It is recommended to only use mild soap ONLY install floor mats designed to fit and water to clean your floor mats. After your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cleaning, always check your floor mat has cannot be properly attached and secured been properly installed and is secured to to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners replaced, only use a FCA approved floor by lightly pulling mat. mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. Rocking The Vehicle ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on Note: Too much rocking may cause 04090400-USA-001 the driver’s side floor area. To check for engine overheating, transmission failure, Floor Mat Retention Post Location interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the and tire damage. accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal If you must rock the vehicle to free it (if present) to check for interference. If your from snow, sand or mud, depress the floor mat interferes with the operation of accelerator slightly and slowly move the any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and gear selector from 1 (D) to R. place the floor mat in your trunk. 179 Contact an authorized dealer to check Do not apply excessive force to a the following: window scraper when removing ice or Warning! frozen snow on the mirror glass and Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in windshield. the radiator. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Never use warm or hot water for Forces generated by excessive wheel Inspect the battery and its leads. removing snow or ice from windows speeds may cause damage, or even Cold reduces battery capacity. and mirrors as it could result in the failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could glass cracking. explode and injure someone. Do not spin Use an engine oil appropriate for the your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph lowest ambient temperatures that the Snow Tires (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds vehicle will be driven in. If your vehicle is equipped with the tire continuously without stopping when you pressure monitoring system (vehicle are stuck and do not let anyone near a Inspect the ignition system for spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. damage and loose connections. with run-flat tires), the system may not function correctly when using tires with Use winter windshield washer fluid steel wire reinforcement in the that will not freeze. Caution! sidewalls. Note: Use Snow Tires on all Four Wheels:

STARTING AND OPERATING Do not exceed the maximum Remove snow before driving. Snow When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by permissible speed for your snow tires or left on the windshield is dangerous as shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do legal speed limits. not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph it could obstruct vision. (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. When snow tires are used, select the Drive slowly. Braking performance specified size and pressure. Revving the engine or spinning the can be adversely affected if snow or wheels too fast may lead to transmission ice adheres to the brake components. Tire Chains overheating and failure. It can also damage If this situation occurs, drive the vehicle Check local regulations before using tire the tires. Do not spin the wheels above slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal chains. 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). and lightly applying the brakes several If your vehicle is equipped with the times until the brake performance TPMS system, the system may not returns to normal. function correctly when using tire Winter Driving Do not open or close the soft top when chains. Carry emergency gear, including tire the temperature is 41 °F (5 °C) or less. chains, window scraper, flares, a small The material of the soft top could be shovel, jumper leads, and a small bag damaged by freezing. of sand or salt.

180 Install the chains on the rear tires only. Driving In Flooded Area Do not use chains on the front tires. Caution! Note: Do not drive the vehicle on Note: flooded roads as it could cause short circuit of electrical/electronic parts, or Chains may affect handling. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, water enters the engine and causes it observe the following precautions: Do not go faster than 30 mph to lock up (hydro-lock) and stall. If the Because of restricted traction device (50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's vehicle has been immersed in water clearance between tires and other contact your authorized dealer. recommended limit, whichever is lower. suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition Although your vehicle is capable of Drive carefully and avoid bumps, driving through shallow standing water, holes, and sharp turns. are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle consider the following Cautions and Avoid locked-wheel braking. immediately if noise occurs that could Warnings before doing so. indicate device breakage. Remove the Do not use chains on roads that are damaged parts of the device before further free of snow or ice. The tires and use. chains could be damaged. Warning! Install device as tightly as possible and Chains may scratch or chip then retighten after driving about ½ mile aluminium wheels. (0.8 km). Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns through standing water. Warning! and large bumps, especially with a loaded Driving through standing water limits vehicle. your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Do not drive for a prolonged period on increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive Snow) between front and rear axles can dry pavement. cause unpredictable handling. You could slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal lose control and have a collision. Observe the traction device several times to dry the brakes. manufacturer’s instructions on the method Failure to follow these warnings may of installation, operating speed, and result in injuries that are serious or fatal to conditions for use. Always use the you, your passengers, and others around suggested operating speed of the device you. manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

181 Overloading This vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance Caution! Note: Be careful not to overload your vehicle. The gross axle weight rating and handling. As a result, the sidewall (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight of the tires are very thin and the tires Always check the depth of the standing rating (GVWR) of the vehicle are on the and wheels can be damaged if driven water before driving through it. Never drive Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on through potholes or on rough/uneven through standing water that is deeper than the driver's door frame. Exceeding roads at excessive speeds. the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the these ratings can cause an accident or Use care and reduce speed when vehicle. vehicle damage. You can estimate the traveling on rough/uneven roads or Determine the condition of the road or weight of the load by weighing the through potholes. the path that is under water and if there are items (or people) before putting them in any obstacles in the way before driving the vehicle. through the standing water. Driving On Uneven Road Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will Your vehicle's suspension and minimize wave effects. underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads or over speed Driving through standing water may STARTING AND OPERATING bumps at excessive speeds. cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s Use care and reduce speed when fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, traveling on rough/uneven roads or over etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid speed bumps. that is milky or foamy in appearance) after Use care not to damage the vehicle's driving through standing water. Do not underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid driving under the following conditions: appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not Ascending or descending a slope covered by the New Vehicle Limited with a sharp transition angle. Warranty. Ascending or descending a driveway Getting water inside your vehicle’s or trailer ramp with a sharp transition engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, angle. and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .184 REPLACING A BULB...... 184 REPLACING FUSES ...... 194 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .203 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 208 JUMPSTARTING...... 217 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .219 TOWINGTHEVEHICLE...... 220 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .222

183 HAZARD WARNING When the switch is pushed, the Hazard REPLACING A BULB LIGHTS Warning Lights are active and all directional turn signals will flash on and General Instructions Control off to warn oncoming traffic of an The Hazard Warning Lights should emergency. Push the switch a second Warning! always be used when you stop on or time to turn off the Hazard Warning near a roadway in an emergency. Lights. The hazard warning indicator The Hazard Warning Light switch is lights in the instrument cluster will flash Before proceeding with the replacement located on the center instrument panel simultaneously. of the lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER OF BURNS! below the radio. Push the switch to turn Note: theHazardWarningLightsonoroff. Modifications or repair of the electrical The turn signals do not work while Note: The Hazard Warning Lights warn system performed incorrectly and without the Hazard Warning Lights are taking into account the technical other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic activated. characteristics can cause malfunctions with hazard and that they must take extreme the risk of fire. caution when near it. Check local regulations about the Halogen lamps contain gas under

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY use of Hazard Warning Lights while the vehicle is being towed to verify that it is pressure, in the event of breakage be careful of the projection of fragments of not in violation of the law. glass. If the brake pedal is pressed while Halogen lamps must be handled by driving on slippery roads, the touching only the metallic part. If the emergency stop signal system could transparent bulb is in contact with the operate causing all of the directional fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted turn signals to flash. light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the While the emergency stop signal bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol system is operating, all of the and allow to dry. 05031100-L12-001AB directional turn signals automatically Hazard Warning Light Switch flash rapidly to caution the driver of a vehicle following behind of a sudden braking situation.

184 Before replacing a bulb check the Note: contacts for oxidation. When removing the lens or light unit Replace blown bulbs with others of using a flathead screwdriver, make the same type and power. sure that the flathead screwdriver does not contact the interior terminal. If the After replacing a headlight bulb, flathead screwdriver contacts the always check its alignment. terminal, a short circuit may occur. To replace the bulb, contact your When the weather is cold or damp authorized dealer. or after heavy rain or washing, the When a light is not working, check surface of headlights or rear lights may that the corresponding fuse is intact steam up and/or form drops of before replacing the bulb. For the condensation on the inside. This is a location of fuses, refer to the section on natural phenomenon due to the “Replacing Fuses” in this chapter. difference in temperature and humidity between the inside and the outside of the glass which does not indicate a Caution! fault and does not compromise the normal operation of lighting devices. The mist disappears quickly when the Use the protective cover and carton for the replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb lights are turned on, starting from the promptly and out of the reach of children. center of the diffuser, extending progressively towards the edges.

185 Replacement Bulbs

Light Bulbs Type Power Front Position LED – Front Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) W5W 5 W Front Positions/Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) WY5W 5 W High Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – High Beam/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) HB3 60 W Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) H11 55 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Side Direction Indicator Light WY5W 5 W Fog Light H11 55 W Rear Position Lights LED – Stop Lights LED – Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – Rear Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Rear Side Marker W5W 5 W Reverse Light W21W 21 W License Plate Light W5W 5 W Overhead Light 10 W Trunk Lid Light 5W

186 Light Bulbs Rear Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven locations and partially peel back the Front Lights The bulbs are arranged as follows : mud guard. The bulbs are arranged as follows :

04110102-L40-010AB Rear Lights 08020499000002 04110102-L38-008AB Mud Guard Head Lights 4 — Position Light/Stop Light/Rear Di- 1 — Fasteners 1 — High Beam with Daytime Running rection Indicator Light 5 — Reverse Light — If Equipped 2 — Mud Guard Lights (DRL)/Position Light/Low Beam/ 6 — Third Stop Light Side Marker 2 — Front Indicator Light 4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 3 — Fog Light Replacing Exterior remove it, disconnect the connector Lights from the unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling Headlights (low beam) the connector. (If Equipped with halogen bulb) 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and remove it. 1. If you are changing the right bulb, 6. Disconnect the bulb from the start the engine, turn the steering wheel socket. all the way to the right, and turn off engine. If you are changing the left bulb, 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse turn the steering wheel to the left. order of the removal procedure. 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 187 Headlights (High Beam) With Daytime Running Lights (If Equipped With LED Lamps) Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in 07031501-206-002AB the OFF mode, and the headlight Mud Guard switch is off. Front Direction Indicator Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven Proceed as follows: locations and partially peel back the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY mud guard. 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly all the way to the right, and turn off counterclockwise and remove it. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 5. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 08020499000010 remove it, disconnect the connector Head Lamp Assembly 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in from the unit by pressing the tab on the the OFF mode, and the headlight connector with your finger and pulling 1 — High Beam Lamp switch is off. 2 — Position Lamp the connector. 3 — Daytime Running Lamp 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly locations and partially peel back the counterclockwise and remove it. mud guard. 7. Disconnect the bulb from the 4. Disconnect the connector from the socket. unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling 8. Install the new bulb in the reverse the connector rearward. order of the removal procedure. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it.

188 Fog Lights Side Direction Indicator Lights Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in start the engine, turn the steering wheel the OFF mode, and the headlight all the way to the right, and turn off switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 2. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 2. Make sure the ignition is switched all the way to the right, and turn off off, and the headlight switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 07031501-207-001 3. Remove the fasteners in the five Front Direction Indicator Housing locations and partially peel back the 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 1 — Socket Assembly mud guard. locations and partially peel back the 2 — Bulb mud guard. 4. Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Disconnect the electrical connector 6. Disconnect the bulb from the connector with your finger and pulling from the bulb by pressing the tab on socket. the connector. the connector with your finger and pulling the connector. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise, extract the bulb and 5. Remove the lens assembly by remove it. pressing the tab on the unit with your finger and pulling the unit forward to 6. Disconnect the bulb from the compress in the internal catch, then pull socket. the cluster outwards. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse 6. Lift up the lens assembly, and then order of the removal procedure. remove the cluster and install the new Brake lights / Tail lights side direction indicator lens assembly in the reverse order of the removal 07031501-208-002AB Go to your authorized dealer when the Direction Indicator Lamp Connector replacement of this lights is necessary. procedure. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

189 08020499-000-011AB Side Direction Indicator 1 — Fasteners IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

07031501211001 08070604-123-100 Side Direction Indicator Front Side Marker 3 — Internal Catch 1 — Socket 4 — Lens Assembly 2 — Bulb Assembly

Front Side Marker 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse 07031501-210-001AB (If Equipped With Halogen Bulb) order of the removal procedure. Side Direction Indicator Proceed as follows: Rear Direction Indicator Lights 2 — Lens Assembly 1. Remove the fasteners in the seven Proceed as follows: locations and partially peel back the 1. Remove the retainers and the trunk upper side of the mud guard. lid end trim. 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise, remove socket assembly then remove the bulb. 190 07031501214002 07031501-215-001 Trunk Trim Taillight Housing Fasteners 2 — Connector 4 — Screw 5 — Nuts 2. Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Pull the taillight housing rearward to connector with your finger. remove it.

07031501-212-002 Trunk Trim 1 — Retainers

07031501213002 07031501-216-001AB Rear Direction Indicator Socket Rear of Vehicle 3 — Connector 6 — Taillight Housing

3. Remove the screw and nuts.

191 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Reverse Light Rear Side Marker counterclockwise to remove from Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: taillight housing, and remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in 1. Push the lens assembly rearward to the OFF mode, and the headlight compress the internal catch, then pull switch is off. the lens assembly outwards. 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise to remove, and remove bulb.

07031501-203-002 Taillight Housing

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7 — Socket and Bulb Assembly 08070605AB Rear Side Marker 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1 — Rear Side Marker Lens Assembly order of the removal procedure. 07031501-219-001 Reverse Light 2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly 1 — Socket Assembly counterclockwise to remove, and 2 — Bulb remove bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

192 License Plate Lights 3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and remove, remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 2. Slide the unit as shown in the figure to remove it.

07031501-221-001 License Plate Light Housing 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure. Insert 08070606-123-100 catch and push the housing back into Side Marker Housing place. 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

3. Install the new bulb and then reinstall the socket in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

07031501220001 Trunk Lid 1 — License Plate Light Assembly

193 Replacing Interior Light REPLACING FUSES Bulbs General Information Overhead Light Proceed as follows: 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent Warning! damage to the lens, remove the overhead light by carefully prying on the When replacing a blown fuse, always edge of the lens. use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse.

07031502-202-001 Never replace a fuse with another fuse of Trunk Light higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. 1 — Trunk Light Lens Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2. Disconnect the connector from the trunk light lens. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 07031502-201-001 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact Overhead Light Location an authorized dealer. 1 — Overhead Light Lens If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, 2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. transmission system) or steering system 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse blows, contact an authorized dealer. order of the removal procedure. 07031502-203-001 Your vehicle's electrical system is Trunk Light Trunk Light Housing protected by fuses. Proceed as follows: 2 — Connector If any lights, accessories, or controls do 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent not work, inspect the appropriate circuit protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside damage to the to the lens, remove the 3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. trunk light lens by carefully prying on element will be melted. If the same fuse the edge of the lens. 4. Install the new bulb in the reverse blows again, go to an authorized dealer order of the removal procedure. as soon as possible. 194 Fuse location 6. Insert a new fuse of the same Fuses are grouped together in two fuse amperage rating, and make sure it fits boxes located in the interior on the left tightly. If it does not fit tightly, contact side of the vehicle and under the hood. your authorized dealer. If you have no spare fuses, borrow one of the same Interior Fuses rating from a circuit not essential to If the electrical system does not work, vehicle operation, such as the audio or first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's outlet circuit. left side. 7. Reinstall the cover and make sure Proceed as follows: that it is securely installed. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in 07031601-122-001 Note: Always replace a fuse with a the OFF mode, and other switches are Fuse Puller genuine FCA fuse or equivalent of the turned off. 5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is same rating. Otherwise you may damage the electric system. 2. Open the fuse panel cover (located blown. near the door).

07031601-ALL-001 Fuses 07031601-121-001 Fuse Panel Cover 1 — Normal Fuse 3. Press retaining clip and remove 2 — Blown Fuse protection cover. 4. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse puller provided on the fuse block located in the engine compartment.

195 Underhood Fuses When removing the cover, remove it 4. If any fuse but the main fuse is If the headlights or other electrical slowly according to the following blown, replace it with a new one of the components do not work and the fuses procedure: same amperage rating. in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse 1. Disengage the rear lock by pressing block in the engine compartment. If a down on the front tab with your fingers. fuse is blown, it must be replaced. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and other switches are turned off and remove the fuse block cover. If the lock is forcefully opened, the fuse block cover may come in contact with the frame when it is removed and become scratched.

07031601-ALL-002AB Fuse IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 07031601-123-001 1 — Normal Fuse Underhood Fuse Block 2 — Blown Fuse 1 — Lock 2 — Cover 5. Reinstall the cover and make sure that it is securely installed. 2. Remove the front tab while slightly lifting the front of the cover. 3. Remove the cover while lifting it and sliding it to the rear.

196 Fuse Block (Engine Compartment)

07031602-121-001

197 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 ENG IG3 5 A Engine Control Systems F02 ENG IG2 5 A Engine Control Systems F03 HORN2 7.5 A Horn F04 C/U IG1 15 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F05 ENG IG1 7.5 A Engine Control System F06 — — — F07 INTERIOR 15 A Overhead Light F08 — — — F09 AUDIO2 15 A Audio System

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F10 METER1 10 A Instrument Cluster F11 SRS1 7.5 A Air Bag F12 — — — F13 RADIO 7.5 A Audio System F14 ENGINE3 20 A Engine Control System F15 ENGINE1 10 A Engine Control System F16 ENGINE2 15 A Engine Control System F17 AUDIO1 25 A Audio System F18 A/C MAG 7.5 A Air Conditioner F19 AT PUMP H/L HI 20 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F20 AT 15 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F21 D LOCK 25 A Power Door Locks F22 H/L RH 20 A Headlight (RH) F23 ENG + B2 7.5 A Engine Control System 198 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F24 TAIL 20 A Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights F25 — — — F26 ROOM 25 A Overhead Light F27 FOG 15 A Fog Lights F28 H/CLEAN 20 A Headlight Washer (If Equipped) F29 STOP 10 A Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped) F30 HORN 15 A Horn F31 H/L LH 20 A Headlight (LH) F32 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS/DSC System F33 HAZARD 15 A Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights F34 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel System F35 ENG + B3 5 A Engine Control System F36 WIPER 20 A Windshield Wipers F37 CABIN + B 50 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F38 — — — F39 — — — F40 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS/DSC System F41 EVVT A/R PUMP 20 A Engine Control System F42 — — — F43 — — — F44 FAN2 40 A Cooling Fan F45 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine Control System

199 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F46 EPS 60 A Power Steering System F47 DEFOG 30 A Rear Window Defogger F48 IG2 30 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F49 — — — F50 HEATER 40 A Air Conditioner F51 — — — F52 — — — IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

200 Fuse Block Interior

07031602-03F-002

201 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 RHT R 30 A — F02 RHT L 30 A — F03 — — — F04 — — — F05 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory Sockets F06 — — — F07 AT IND 7.5 A AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped F08 MIRROR 7.5 A Power Control Mirror F09 R_DECK R 30 A —

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F10 R_DECK L 30 A — F11 F.WASHER 15 A Windshield Washer F12 P.WINDOW 30 A Power Windows F13 — — — F14 SRS2/ESCL 15 A — F15 — — — F16 — — —

202 JACKING AND TIRE Tools Location CHANGING Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire, jack, lug wrench and tow eyes. For details, contact an authorized Warning! dealer. Tools are stored in the trunk. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 08020101-124-001 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is Jack Location dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the 1 — Cover Tab jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. 2 — Jack And Tools Cover Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service 2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw center where it can be raised on a lift. 08020100-122-002 counterclockwise. The jack is designed to be used as a Jack Tools tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service 1 — Jack Lever purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on 2 — Lug Wrench (If Equipped) a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or 3 — Tow Eyes (If Equipped) slippery areas. Preparations For Jacking To Remove The Jack Proceed as follows: 1. In the right side of the trunk, pull the 08020101-122-001 cover tab to remove cover. Jack Components 3 — Wing Bolt 4 — Jack Screw

203 To Secure The Jack Conditions Of Non-Use 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Lights and engage the parking brake. Proceed as follows: Temperatures below -40°F (−40°C) 1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with On sandy or muddy ground 3. For vehicles with automatic the jack screw pointing back, and turn transmission, place the gear selector in the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily On uneven ground PARK. For vehicles with manual tighten it. On steep roads transmission, place gear selector in REVERSE and turn the engine to OFF. 2. Turn the jack screw clockwise. In extreme weather conditions 4. Stop the engine. The motor must be 3. Turn the wing bolt completely to In direct contact with the engine or kept off as long as the vehicle is lifted secure the jack. for repairs under the vehicle off the ground. 4. Insert the cover tabs and install the On boats 5. Remove the jack and tools. cover. Jacking Instructions 6. Block both the front and rear of the Note: Make sure the jack is well wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking Warning! lubricated before using it. position. For example, if changing the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Warning! collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places Do not attempt to change a tire on the side provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull repaired or replaced immediately. far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Maintenance Always keep the jack clean. Proceed as follows:

Make sure the moving parts are kept 1. Stop the vehicle in a position that 08020300-121-001 free from dirt or rust. does not cause any danger to traffic Blocking Right Front Tire And Left Make sure the screw thread is and lets you change the tire in safety, as Rear Tire adequately lubricated. far as possible from the edge of the driving lane. The ground must be flat and sufficiently compact.

204 Removing A Tire 4. Continue raising the jack head gradually by rotating the screw with your hand until the jack head is inserted Warning! into the lift point.

Carefully follow these tire changing Caution! warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Always park on a firm, level surface as Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by far from the edge of the roadway as jacking on locations other than those possible before raising the vehicle. 08020301-123-001 indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this Loosen Lug Nuts Counterclockwise Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. vehicle. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the 2. Place the jack under the lift point wheel to be raised. closest to the tire being changed with the jack head squarely under the Set the parking brake firmly and set the jacking location. transmission in PARK. Do not let any passenger sit in the 3. Turn the jack screw in the direction vehicle when it is on a jack. shown and adjust the jack head so that it is close to the jacking location. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a 08020301-121-001 tire change. Front Jacking Location If working on or near a roadway, be 5. Insert the jack lever and attach the extremely careful of motor traffic. lug wrench to tire jack.

Proceed as follows: 08020301-ALL-003 1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them Raising The Jack counterclockwise one turn each, but do 1 — Jack Head not remove any lug nuts until the tire has been raised off the ground. 205 To Remove An Anti-theft Lug Nut Warning! Proceed as follows: 1. Obtain the special key for the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary anti-theft lug nut. can make the vehicle less stable. It could 2. Place the special key on top of the slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. anti-theft lug nut, and be sure to hold Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. the key square to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you may damage both key and nut. Do not use a power impact

08020301-ALL-006 7. Remove the lug nuts by turning wrench. Jack With Lug Wrench Attached them counterclockwise, then remove the wheel. 3. Place the lug wrench on top of the Locking Lug Nuts — If Equipped key and apply pressure. Turn the wrench counterclockwise. Warning! If your vehicle has optional anti-theft To Install The Anti-theft Lug Nut

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will lock the tires and you must use a Proceed as follows: Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the special key to unlock them. This key will 1. Place the special key on top of the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. attach to the lug wrench. nut, and be sure to hold the key square Never get any part of your body under a Register them with the lock to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get manufacturer by filling out the card may damage both key and nut. Do not under a raised vehicle, take it to a service provided in the glove compartment and use a power impact wrench. center where it can be raised on a lift. mailing it in the accompanying envelope. If you lose this key, contact 2. Place the lug wrench on top of the 6. Turn the jack handle clockwise and an authorized dealer or use the lock special key, apply pressure, and turn it raise the vehicle high enough so that manufacturer's order form, which is clockwise. the tire is just raised off the ground and with the registration card. Mounting The Tire can be removed. Before removing the Accessory wheel locks cannot be used Proceed as follows: lug nuts, make sure your vehicle is on steel wheels. This includes situations firmly in position and that it cannot slip when the spare tire is installed. If the 1. Remove dirt and grime from the or move. spare tire is installed, one of the original mounting surfaces of the wheel and lug nuts (which should still be in the hub, including the hub bolts, with a vehicle) must be installed in place of the cloth. wheel lock.

206 With TPMS Do not push the tire pressure monitoring system set switch after installing the spare tire. The switch is only to be pushed after installing the repaired flat tire or installing a replacement tire. Note: To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store them properly.

08020303-XX4-001 08020303-122-001 Clean Mounting Surface Lug Nut Tightening Order Warning! 2. Mount the tire and install the lug nuts with the beveled edge inward, then A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Warning! tighten them by hand. collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire Caution! the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully repaired or replaced immediately. until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious Be sure to mount the spare tire with the injury. valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is 4. After tightening the lug nuts, have mounted incorrectly. them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 3. Turn the lug wrench to verify correct tightness. counterclockwise and lower the vehicle. Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts 5. Remove the tire blocks and store in the order shown. the tools and jack. 6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to “Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure” in “Technical Specifications” for more information.

207 TIRE SERVICE KIT Tire Service Kit Mexico Market: Components And Tire Service Storage Operation The Tire Service Kit is located inside the The Tire Service Kit includes the trunk. following items: U.S.A. And Canada Markets:

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location The Tire Service Kit included with your vehicle is for a temporary repair of a slightly damaged flat tire resulting from running over nails or similar sharp 08070606456456 objects on the road surface. Tire Service Kit Components — Perform the emergency flat tire repair Mexico Markets without removing the nail or similar sharp object which punctured the tire. 1— Tire Sealant 2— Compressor Note: Your vehicle is not equipped with 3— Valve Core Tool a spare tire. In the event of a flat tire, 08070606457457 4— Injection Hose use the Tire Service Kit to repair the tire Tire Service Kit Components — 5— Spare Valve Core temporarily. When doing the repair, refer U.S.A. And Canada Markets 6— Speed Restriction Sticker to the instructions included in the Tire 1— Sealant Bottle 7— Instructions Service Kit. If an emergency repair was 2— Compressor performed on a flat tire using the Tire 3— Speed Restriction Sticker Service Kit, contact an authorized 4— Repaired Tire Sticker dealer to repair or replace the tire as 5— Instructions soon as possible. 208 Tire Service Usage Sealing A Tire With Tire absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, Precautions Service Kit eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is The tire sealant cannot be reused. If the any contact with eyes or skin. Change sealant has been used, or is expired, Warning! clothing as soon as possible, if there is any purchase new tire sealant at an contact with clothing. authorized dealer. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains Note: The Tire Service Kit cannot be Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, used in the following cases. Consult an of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire authorized dealer if any of these enough off the road to avoid the danger of Service Kit out of reach of children. If being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. conditions exist: swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the plenty of water and drink plenty of water. The period of effective use for the vehicle under the following circumstances: Do not induce vomiting! Consult a tire sealant has expired (the period of physician immediately. effectiveness is indicated on the bottle If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. label) U.S.A. And CANADA Markets: If the tire has any sidewall damage. The tear or puncture in the tire Proceed as follows: exceeds about 0.16 inches (4 mm) If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn The damage has occurred to an on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. area of the tire other than the tread If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the The vehicle has been driven with If the wheel has any damage. wheel with the deflated tire) is in a nearly no air remaining in the tire position that is near to the ground. This If you are unsure of the condition of the will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to The tire has come off the wheel rim tire or the wheel. reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Damage to the wheel rim has Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Service Kit flat on the ground. This will occurred flames or heat sources. provide the best positioning of the kit The tire has two or more punctures A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward when injecting the sealant into the in a collision or hard stop could endanger deflated tire and running the air pump. the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Move the vehicle as necessary to place the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. the valve stem in this position before Failure to follow these warnings can result proceeding. in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE Take care not to allow the contents of for a manual transmission, and PARK Tire Service Kit to come in contact with for automatic transmission. hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or 209 4. Apply the parking brake with the Note: brake pedal pressed and turn the Do not shake the bottle engine OFF. excessively. Otherwise, the sealant could spray out of the injection hose. If 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then the sealant contacts clothing or other remove the Tire Service Kit. objects, you may not be able to remove it. The sealant hardens easily, and injecting it will be difficult under cold weather conditions (32 °F (0 °C) or below). Warm the sealant inside the vehicle to facilitate injection. 08020202-031-670 Install Air Compressor To Sealant 7. Pull out the air compressor hose Bottle and the air compressor plug from the 3 — Air Compressor Hose air compressor. 4 — Injection Valve IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location Note: Make sure that the air 6. Gently shake the sealant bottle to compressor switch is off before mix the contents. Then extend the inserting the air compressor hose into injection hose. the injection valve of the bottle. If the air compressor hose is not installed to the injection valve of the bottle securely, the sealant may leak. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve

08020202-36A-004 of the flat tire, install the injection hose Air Compressor With Hose And to the tire valve, and turn the sleeve to Plug the right to tighten. 2 — Air Compressor Hose

8. Install the air compressor hose, 08020202-03A-666 Sealant Bottle With Injection Hose which was pulled out of the air compressor, into the injection valve of 1 — Injection Hose the bottle. 210 11. Insert the air compressor plug into the accessory socket inside the vehicle Warning! and place the ignition to ACC. Note: When inserting the air compressor plug into or removing it Never use the air compressor above 3 Bar (43.5 psi). Using the air compressor at an from the accessory socket, make sure inflation pressure above 3 Bar (43.5 psi) that the air compressor switch is off. continuously is dangerous. If the air When turning the air compressor on/off, compressor overheats, hot air will be use the air compressor switch. Before exhausted and you could get burned. checking the tire inflation pressure using 08020202-03A-004AB the tire pressure gauge, turn the air Valve And Valve Cover compressor switch off. Caution! 5 — Valve Cap 12. The sealant is injected into the tire 6 — Valve when the air compressor is switched on. After the sealant is injected If the tire inflation pressure does not increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If 10. Install the bottle to the air completely, wait until the tire inflation the tire does not reach the specified tire compressor and push it in until the left pressure increases to the specified tire inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may and right tabs are engaged securely. inflation pressure. For the correct have received extensive damage. In this pressure, check the tire inflation case, the repair using the tire service kit pressure label on the driver's door was not successful. frame. Do not operate the air compressor for a Note: The inflation pressure may continuous 10 minutes or longer because increase to about 43.5 psi (3 Bar) using it for long periods could cause a temporarily to inject the sealant through malfunction. the valve. Normally, the inflation pressure decreases gradually and it 13. Adhere the speed restriction sticker reaches the actual inflation pressure to an area where it can be viewed easily after about 30 seconds. by the driver.

08020202-031-669 Sealant Bottle Into Air Compressor 7 — Air Compressor Tabs

211 16. Remove the air compressor hose Note: With TPMS System: if the tire from the injection valve of the bottle. is not properly inflated, the warning Warning! Then, install the injection hose to the light will illuminate. injection valve of the bottle to prevent After driving the vehicle for about leakage of any remaining sealant. Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect to the padded area on the steering wheel. the air compressor to the tire using Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is Step nine of the procedure, and check dangerous because the air bag may not the tire inflation pressure using the tire operate (deploy) normally resulting in pressure gauge on the air compressor. serious injury. In addition, do not adhere If the tire inflation pressure is lower than the sticker to areas where warning lights or the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the speedometer cannot be viewed. the air compressor on and wait until it reaches the specified tire inflation 14. Adhere the repaired tire sticker to pressure. the wheel of the flat tire. The Tire Service Kit is completed

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-031-668 successfully if the tire inflation pressure Install Injection Hose To Sealant does not decrease. Carefully drive the Bottle vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer Note: The remaining sealant in the immediately and have the flat tire hose may spray out when the hose is replaced. Replacement with a new tire removed. Remove the hose carefully is recommended. If the tire is to be because you may not be able to repaired or reused, consult an remove the sealant contacting clothing authorized dealer. or other objects. Note: 17. Install the tire valve cap. If an emergency flat tire repair has 08020202-031-667 been performed using the Tire Service Repaired Tire Sticker 18. Place the Tire Service Kit back into its storage location. Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be 15. When the tire inflates to the replaced with a new one as soon as specified tire inflation pressure, turn the 19. Start driving immediately to spread possible. If the tire is to be repaired or air compressor switch off, turn the the sealant in the tire. reused, contact an authorized dealer. sleeve of the injection hose to the left, Note: Carefully drive the vehicle at a Thewheelcanbereusedifthe and pull it out of the tire valve. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If sealant adhering to it is removed. the vehicle is driven at a speed of However, replace the valve with a new 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle one. may vibrate. 212 Sealing A Tire With Tire absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, 4. Apply the parking brake with the Service Kit eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush brake pedal pressed and turn the immediately with plenty of water if there is engine OFF. any contact with eyes or skin. Change Warning! clothing as soon as possible, if there is any 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then contact with clothing. remove the Tire Service Kit.

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 6. Gently shake the tire sealant. If the of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, bottle is shaken after the injection hose enough off the road to avoid the danger of consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire is screwed on, tire sealant could spray being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Service Kit out of reach of children. If out from the injection hose. Tire sealant swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the contacting clothing or other objects plenty of water and drink plenty of water. may be impossible to remove. Shake vehicle under the following circumstances: Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. the bottle before screwing on the If the puncture in the tire tread is injection hose. approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage. Mexico Market Note: Proceed as follows: Do not shake the bottle If the tire has any damage from driving excessively. Otherwise, the sealant with extremely low tire pressure. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn could spray out of the injection hose, If the tire has any damage from driving on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. and if the sealant contacts clothing or on a flat tire. other objects, you may not be able to 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the If the wheel has any damage. remove it. wheel with the deflated tire) is in a The sealant hardens easily and If you are unsure of the condition of the position that is near to the ground. This injecting it will be difficult under cold tire or the wheel. will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to weather conditions 32 °F (0 °C) or reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Keep Tire Service Kit away from open below. Warm the sealant inside the flames or heat sources. Service Kit flat on the ground. This will vehicle to facilitate injection. provide the best positioning of the kit A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward when injecting the sealant into the 7. Remove the cap from the bottle and in a collision or hard stop could endanger deflated tire and running the air pump. screw on the injection hose with the the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Move the vehicle as necessary to place bottle's inner cap left on to break the the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result the valve stem in this position before inner cap. in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, proceeding. your passengers, and others around you. 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE Take care not to allow the contents of for a manual transmission, or PARK for Tire Service Kit to come in contact with automatic transmission. hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or 213 Note: Store the valve core in a place where it will not get dirty. 10. Insert the injection hose into the valve.

08020202-03A-004AB Valve And Valve Cover 5 — Valve Cap 6 — Tire Valve

08020202-03A-008AB IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Note: If there is air remaining in the Injection Hose Into Valve tire when the valve core is removed, the 11. Hold the bottom of the bottle valve core could fly out. Remove the upright, squeeze the bottle with your valve core carefully. hands, and inject the entire amount of 9. Turn the valve core counter tire sealant into the tire. clockwise with the valve core tool and 0802020203A003 remove the valve core. Attaching Injection Hose To Sealant Bottle 8. Remove the valve cap from the flat tire. Push the back of a valve core tool to the core of the tire valve and bleed out all of the remaining air.

08020202-03A-008 Squeeze Sealant Into Tire

08020202-03A-005AB Turn Valve Core Counterclockwise 214 12. Pull out the injection hose from the 15. Adhere the speed restriction sticker 17. Install the air compressor hose to valve. to an area where it can be viewed easily the tire valve. by the driver.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not

08020202-03A-007AB operate (deploy) normally resulting in 08020202-03A-00BAB Turn Valve Core Clockwise To serious injury. In addition, do not adhere Air Compressor Hose Into Valve Reinstall the sticker to areas where warning lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed. 18. Insert the air compressor plug into 13. Reinsert the valve core into the the accessory socket inside the vehicle valve and turn it clockwise to install. and place the ignition to ACC. 16. Pull out the air compressor hose Note: and the air compressor plug from the 19. Turn the air compressor switch on The tire sealant cannot be reused. air compressor. and inflate the tire carefully to the If the tire sealant kit has been used, or correct inflation pressure. For the is expired, purchase new one at an correct pressure, check the tire inflation authorized dealer. pressure label on the driver's door Do not throw away the empty tire frame. sealant bottle after use. Return the empty tire sealant bottle to an Note: When inserting the air authorized dealer when replacing the compressor plug into or removing it tire. The empty tire sealant bottle will from the accessory socket, make sure need to be used to extract and that the air compressor switch is off. dispose of the used sealant from the When turning the air compressor on/off, tire. use the air compressor switch. Before 08020202-36A-004 checking the tire inflation pressure using 14. Install the injection hose to the tab Air Compressor With Hose And the tire pressure gauge, turn the air of the bottle to prevent leakage of any Plug compressor switch off. remaining sealant. 2 — Air Compressor Hose

215 Note: If an emergency flat tire repair has been performed using the Tire Service Caution! Carefully drive the vehicle at a Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If replaced with a new one as soon as the vehicle is driven at a speed of possible. If the tire is to be repaired or If the tire inflation pressure does not 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle reused, contact an authorized dealer. increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If may vibrate. the tire does not reach the specified tire The tire can be reused if the sealant inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may With TPMS System: if the tire is adhering to it is removed. However, have received extensive damage. In this not properly inflated, the warning replace the valve with a new one. case, the repair using the tire service kit light will illuminate. was not successful. Replacing The Bottle After driving the vehicle for about Do not operate the air compressor for a 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect Note: The tire sealant has a period of continuous 10 minutes or longer because the air compressor to the tire using effective use. Check the period of using it for long periods could cause a effective use indicated on the bottle malfunction. step nine of the procedure, and check the tire inflation pressure using the tire labelanddonotuseitifithasexpired. pressure gauge on the air compressor. Have the tire sealant replaced at an IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Note: If the tire has been over If the tire inflation pressure is lower authorized dealer before the period of inflated, loosen the screw cap on the air effective use has expired. compressor and bleed some of the air than the specified tire inflation out. pressure, turn the air compressor on Inspect the Tire Service Kit at regular and wait until it reaches the specified intervals as well as the operation of the tire inflation pressure; tire compressor. 20. When the tire inflates to the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the The emergency flat tire repair is air compressor switch off, turn the completed successfully if the tire sleeve of the air compressor hose to inflation pressure does not decrease. the left, and pull it out of the tire valve. Carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer and have the 21. Install the tire valve cap. flat tire replaced. Replacement with a new tire is recommended. If the tire is 22. Place the Tire Service Kit back into to be repaired or reused, contact a its storage location. authorized dealer. 23. Start driving immediately to spread the sealant in the tire.

216 JUMP STARTING Preparations For Jump Caution! Starting If the battery is discharged, a jump Do not use a portable battery booster pack starting procedure can be performed or any other booster source with a system using the battery and the cables of voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to another vehicle, or using a booster the battery, starter motor, alternator or battery. electrical system may occur. Jump starting is dangerous if done incorrectly, so follow the procedure in Jump-Starting this section carefully. If you feel unsure Procedure about jump starting, it is strongly recommended that you have a competent service technician do the Warning! work. Note: When a booster battery is being Failure to follow this jump starting used, comply with the utilization and procedure could result in personal injury or precaution instructions specified by the property damage due to battery explosion. manufacturer.

08030100121001 Jump Start Locations Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures could Warning! result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

217 To jump start the vehicle, follow this 4. Connect the positive end of the Do not push-start a vehicle that has procedure: jumper cable to the positive terminal on a manual transmission. It can damage the discharged battery. the emission control system. 1. Remove the positive terminal cover. 5. Connect the opposite end of the Starting A Flooded positive jumper cable to the positive Engine terminal on the booster battery. If the engine fails to start, it may be 6. Connect the negative end of the flooded (excessive fuel in the engine). negative jumper cable to the negative Follow this procedure: terminal of the booster battery. 1. If the engine does not start within 7. Connect the opposite end of the 5 seconds on the first try, wait negative jumper cable to a good engine 10 seconds and try again. ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery (exposed metal part 2. Make sure the parking brake is on. 08030100-122-001 of the engine) away from the battery Positive Terminal Cover 3. Press the accelerator all the way and IN CASE OF EMERGENCY and the fuel injection system. hold it there. 2. Make sure the booster battery is 12 Volts and that the negative terminal 8. Start the engine of the booster 4. Press the clutch pedal (manual is grounded. vehicle and run it a few minutes. Then transmission) or the brake pedal start the engine of the other vehicle. (automatic transmission), then push the 3. Turn off the engine of the vehicle 9. Once the engine is started, remove push button start. If the engine starts, with the booster battery and all release the accelerator immediately unnecessary electrical loads in both the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. because the engine will suddenly rev vehicles. up. 10. Replace the positive terminal cover. Make sure cover is secure. 5. If the engine fails to start, crank it Warning! without pressing the accelerator. Bump Starting If the engine still does not start using the above procedure, have your vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other Never jump start the engine by pushing, as this could establish a ground towing or coasting downhill. inspected an authorized dealer. connection and personal injury could result. Note: You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing it.

218 IF YOUR ENGINE If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment: OVERHEATS Warning! Do not go near the front of the vehicle. If Your Engine Overheats Stop the engine. Wait until the steam In any of the following situations, you You or others can be badly burned by hot dissipates, then open the hood and can reduce the potential for overheating engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from start the engine. by taking the appropriate action. your radiator. If you see or hear steam If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is coming from under the hood, do not open On highways — slow down. the hood until the radiator has had time to Escaping: cool. Never try to open a cooling system Open the hood and idle the engine until In city traffic — while stopped, place pressure cap when the radiator or coolant it cools. the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do bottle is hot. not increase engine idle speed. Note: If the cooling fan does not operate Note: There are steps that you can Caution! take to slow down an impending while the engine is running, the engine overheat condition: temperature will increase. Stop the engine and contact an authorized If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge dealer. turn it off. The A/C system adds heat reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. to the engine cooling system and Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner If the engine continues to overheat turning the A/C off can help remove turned off until the pointer drops back into or frequently overheats, have the this heat. the normal range. If the pointer remains on cooling system inspected. The engine the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, could be seriously damaged unless You can also turn the temperature and call for service. repairs are made. Contact an control to maximum heat, the mode authorized dealer. control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

219 TOWING THE VEHICLE Caution! Attaching The Tow Eyes — If Equipped The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device Warning! in accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with location. tow eyes. 08060203-121-001AB Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Front Bumper Cap Location vehicles off the road or where there are Chains may break, causing serious injury or obstacles. death. 1— Front Bumper Cap Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or take place with two vehicles (one towing, death. the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Failure to follow proper tow eye usage Damage to your vehicle may occur if these may cause components to break resulting guidelines are not followed. in serious injury or death. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

Proceed as follows: 08060203-122-001AB 1. Remove the towing eyelet and the Rear Bumper Cap Location lug wrench from the luggage compartment. Note: Do not use excessive force as it may damage the cap or scratch the 2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or painted bumper surface. Remove the similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent cap completely and store it so as not to damage to a painted bumper, and open lose it. the cap located on the front or rear bumper. 220 3. Securely install the tow eye in front Emergency Towing or rear using the lug wrench or Caution! Towing Description equivalent. Proper lifting and towing are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not Government and local laws must be use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or followed. highway towing. You could damage your A towed vehicle usually should have its vehicle. drive wheels (rear wheels) OFF of the ground. If excessive damage or other When using the tow eyes, always pull conditions prevent this, use wheel the lead or chain in a straight direction dollies. with respect to the eyelet. Never apply When towing with the rear wheels on a sideways force. the ground, release the parking brake. 08060201-121-001AB Installing Front Towing Eye Note: Follow the precautions below to avoid damage to the towing eyelet and Caution! towing hook, vehicle body, or transmission system when towing: DO NOT use sling-type equipment when Do not tow a vehicle heavier than towing. When securing the vehicle to a yours. flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your Do not suddenly accelerate your vehicle may result from improper towing. vehicle as it will apply a severe shock to the tow eye and towing hook or rope.

08060201-122-001AB Do not attach any rope other than Installing Rear Tow Eye to the tow eye and towing hook. 4. Hook the towing rope to the tow eye.

221 If towing service is not available in an EVENT DATA emergency, the vehicle may be towed RECORDER (EDR) with all four wheels on the ground using the towing hook at the front of the This vehicle is equipped with an Event vehicle. Only tow the vehicle on paved Data Recorder (EDR). The main surfaces for short distances at low purpose of an EDR is to record data speeds. that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under Follow these instructions when towing certain crash or near crash-like the vehicle with all wheels on the situations, such as an air bag ground: deployment or hitting a road obstacle. 1. Shift to NEUTRAL for manual Please refer to “Occupant Restraint transmission or automatic transmission. Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder 2. Place the ignition to ACC. (EDR). 3. Release the parking brake. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Note: Remember that power assist for the brakes and steering will not be available when the engine is not running.

222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION...... 224 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 231 BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 235 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. . .235 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 237 WHEELS AND TIRES...... 238 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...... 254 STORINGTHEVEHICLE...... 255 BODYWORK ...... 256 INTERIORS ...... 262

223 INTRODUCTION Limited Warranty coverage Claims against the warranty resulting Be extremely careful and prevent injury disagreement occur. Failure to do so from lack of maintenance, as opposed to yourself and others or damage to can result in your New Vehicle Limited to defective materials or authorized FCA your vehicle when using this Owner’s Warranty being voided either in whole workmanship, will not be honored. Manual for inspection and maintenance. or in part. Any auto repair shop using parts If you are unsure about any procedure it This evidence may consist of the equivalent to your vehicle's original describes, we strongly urge you to have following: equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be a reliable and qualified service shop The FCA Scheduled Maintenance done by an authorized dealer using perform the work, preferably at your Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, genuine FCA parts. Selecting authorized dealer. must be completely filled out showing “Maintenance Monitor” enables the Factory-trained FCA technicians and mileage, repair order number, date for system to notify you of your vehicle's genuine FCA parts are best for your each service, and signed by a qualified approaching inspection/servicing vehicle. Without this expertise and the automotive service technician who period. parts that have been designed and service vehicles. made especially for your vehicle, Owner Maintenance Original copies of repair orders or inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient Precautions other receipts that include the mileage servicing may result in problems. This and date the vehicle was serviced. The owner or a qualified service could lead to vehicle damage or an Each receipt should be signed by a technician should make these vehicle accident and injuries. qualified automotive service technician. inspections at the indicated intervals to SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE For expert advice and quality service, ensure safe and dependable operation. contact your authorized dealer. For self maintenance, a statement Bring any problem to the attention of an Note: Under no circumstances should that you completed the maintenance yourself, displaying mileage and the authorized dealer or qualified service oil change intervals exceed 10,000 technician as soon as possible. miles (16,000 kilometers) or 1 year. date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the replacement parts (fluid, To continue New Vehicle Limited When refueling perform inspection filters, etc.) indicating the date and of: Warranty eligibility and to protect your mileage must accompany this investment, it is your responsibility to statement. Brake and clutch fluid level properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended Note: If you elect to perform Engine coolant level maintenance yourself or have your schedules outlined in this Owner’s Engine oil level Manual. As part of this you must keep vehicle serviced at a location other than your maintenance records, receipts, an authorized dealer, FCA requires that Washer fluid level repair orders and any other documents all fluids, parts and materials must meet as evidence this maintenance was FCA standards for durability and performed. You must present these performance as described in this documents, should any New Vehicle Owner’s Manual. 224 At least monthly perform inspection Periodic Checks The following checks must be carried of: Every 620 miles (1,000 km) or before out more often than indicated in the Tire inflation pressures long trips check and, if necessary, top Scheduled Servicing Plan: off: At least twice a year (for example, Check front disc brake pad condition every spring and fall) perform Engine coolant level. and wear. inspection of: Brake fluid level. Check cleanliness of underhood area Engine coolant and all door and trunk locks, cleanliness Windshield washer fluid level. and lubrication of linkage. Engine oil Tire inflation pressure and condition. As explained in the “Introduction” Visually inspect conditions of the: paragraph, several procedures can be Operation of lighting system engine, transmission, lines and hoses done only by a qualified service (headlights, direction indicators, hazard (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and technician with special tools. warning lights, etc.). rubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.). For details, read the separate Warranty Operation of windshield Check battery charge and battery Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you washer/wiper system and fluid level. are unsure about any servicing or positioning/wear of windshield wiper Visually inspect conditions of the maintenance procedure, have it done blades. accessory drive belts. by an authorized dealer. Every 1860 miles (3,000 km) check There are strict environmental laws and top off the engine oil level if Check and, if necessary, change regarding the disposal of waste oil and required. engine oil and replace oil filter. fluids. Please dispose of your waste Heavy-Duty Use Of The Check and, if necessary, replace properly and with due regard to the cabin air filter. environment. Vehicle Check and, if necessary, replace air We recommend that you entrust the oil If the vehicle is used under one of the cleaner. and fluid changes of your vehicle to an following conditions: authorized dealer. Dusty roads. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 - (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a 5 miles (7-8km)atsub-zero outside dusty and off road environment or is temperatures. operated predominately at idle or only Engine idling for long periods of time very low engine RPM’s. This type of or driving long distances at low speeds vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. or long periods of inactivity.

225 Scheduled Servicing Plan

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check TIREKIT ••••••••••••••• expiration date (if provided). Check operation of lighting

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage ••••••••••••••• compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, ••••••••••••••• windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

226 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check engine control system operation (via ••••••••••••••• diagnostic tool). Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - ••••• • • fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of steering elements and ••••• • • check their operation. Check the front and rear suspension, tie rods, CV ••••• • • Joints, and replace if necessary. Check endfloat of wheel ••••• • • bearings.

227 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade •• ••• • • • position/wear. Check operation of windshield washer system •• ••• • • • and adjust jets if necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks and •• ••• • • • cleanliness and lubrication of linkages. Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if ••••••••••••••• necessary. Visually check the condition and wear of the ••••••••••••••• front and rear brakes. Visually inspect condition of evaporation control ••• • • system. 228 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Visual inspect the condition and tensioning of •• • the accessory drive belt. Replace the accessory • drive belt. **** Inspect and replace PCV • valve if necessary. Change engine oil and In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first. replace oil filter.* Replace spark plugs (1.4L ••• • • Turbo engine).**

****Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads. *The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year. **The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “Technical Specifications” for further information). Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement. Contact your authorized dealer if you have any questions. 229 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Replace engine air filter.# ••• • • Replace Cabin Air Filter – If ••••• • • Equipped. *** Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles •• (240,000 km) whichever

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE comes first. Replace the timing belt • (1.4L Turbo Engine).

#The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas. ***Replace every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or two years. Replacement every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or one year in dusty conditions or as optional/suggested replacement.

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 230 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels

07030300-121-003 1 — Window Washer Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Cap 6 — Battery

231 Engine Oil Engine Coolant

Warning! Warning!

Be very careful when working in the Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan engine compartment when the engine is motor lead before working near the radiator hot: you may get burned. cooling fan. Do not get too close to the radiator You or others can be badly burned by cooling fan: the electric fan may start; hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam 07030403-121-001 danger of injury. Engine Compartment from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open Loose clothing might be pulled by the hood until the radiator has had time to moving parts. 1 — Engine Oil Dipstick 2 — Engine Oil Cap cool. Never open a cooling system Recommended Oil pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in 5. Pull the dipstick out again and “Technical Specifications” for further Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry examine the level. The level is normal if information. away from the radiator cooling fan when it is between Low and Full. If it is near the hood is raised. The fan starts Inspecting engine oil level or below Low, open the engine oil

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE automatically and may start at any time, Proceed as follows: cap/filler 2 and add enough oil to bring whether the engine is running or not. the level to Full. 1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn surface. Note: Do not overfill the engine oil. This may cause engine damage. the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is 2. Warm up the engine to normal temperature controlled and can start at any operating temperature. 6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick time the ignition is in the ON mode. is positioned properly before reinserting You or others can be badly burned by 3. Turn it off and wait at least five the dipstick. hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam minutes for the oil to return to the from your radiator. If you see or hear steam sump. 7. Reinsert the dipstick fully. coming from under the hood, do not open Engine oil consumption the hood until the radiator has had time to 4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, cool. Never try to open a cooling system and reinsert it fully. During the initial period of use the pressure cap when the radiator is hot. engine oil consumption conditions should stabilize after the first 3000 – 3500 miles (5000 – 6000 km). 232 Inspecting Coolant Level It should be kept between the MAX Note: Changing the coolant should be and MIN lines. done by your authorized dealer. The level normally drops with Inspect the antifreeze protection and accumulated use, a condition coolant level in the coolant reservoir at associated with wear of brake and least once a year, at the beginning of clutch linings. If it is excessively low, the winter season, and before traveling have the brake/clutch system where temperatures may drop below inspected. Contact your authorized freezing. dealer. Inspect the condition and connections of all cooling system and heater hoses. 07030501-121-001 Replace any that are worn or Coolant Reservoir deteriorated. If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant by mixing a minimum solution of 50% Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate Warning! for FIAT Spider. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are Do not open hot engine cooling system. anticipated. Bring the level to F (Full). Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when Please contact your authorized dealer the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or 07030601-121-002 remove the cap to cool an overheated for assistance. Brake Fluid Reservoir engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in Securely tighten the coolant reservoir the cooling system. To prevent scalding or tank cap after adding coolant. injury, do not remove the pressure cap If the coolant reservoir is empty or new Warning! while the system is hot or under pressure. coolant is required frequently, contact Do not use a pressure cap other than your authorized dealer. the one specified for your vehicle. Personal Use only manufacturer's recommended injury or engine damage may result. Brake/Clutch Fluid brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level information. Using the wrong type of brake The coolant should be at full in the The brakes and clutch draw fluid fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The radiator and between the F (Full) and L from the same reservoir. (Low) marks on the coolant reservoir proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is when the engine is cool. Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir also identified on the original factory regularly. installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

233 To avoid contamination from foreign If the vehicle will not be used for an matter or moisture, use only new brake extended time, disconnect the battery fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly leads and charge the battery every six closed container. Keep the master cylinder weeks. reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture Battery Replacement from the air resulting in a lower boiling Contact your authorized dealer to point. This may cause it to boil purchase a replacement battery. unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. Warning! Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can 07030901-121-001 result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution Brake fluid can also damage painted and Use plain water if washer fluid is and can burn or even blind you. Do not vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to unavailable. But use only washer fluid in allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, avoid its contact with these surfaces. cold weather to prevent it from freezing. skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in Do not allow petroleum based fluid to Automatic Transmission eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal Control Unit with large amounts of water. Refer to components could be damaged, causing “Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of partial or complete brake failure. This could The transmission oil level should only be Emergency” for further information. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE result in a collision. checked at your authorized dealer. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Battery Maintenance Keep flame or sparks away from the Windshield And To get the best service from a battery: battery. Do not use a booster battery or Headlight Washer Fluid any other booster source with an output Keep it securely mounted. greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable Inspecting Washer Fluid Level clamps to touch each other. Keep the top clean and dry. Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid Battery posts, terminals, and related reservoir, open the cap and add fluid if Keep terminals and connections accessories contain lead and lead necessary. clean, tight, and coated with petroleum compounds. Wash hands after handling. jelly or terminal grease. Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

234 BATTERY MAINTENANCE RECHARGING Caution! PROCEDURES BATTERY CHARGING The following pages contain PROCEDURE instructions on the required It is essential when replacing the cables maintenance from the technical on the battery that the positive cable is personnel who designed the vehicle. attached to the positive post and the In addition to these specific Warning! negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) maintenance instructions specified for and negative (-) and are identified on the routine scheduled servicing, there are Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution battery case. Cable clamps should be tight other components which may require and can burn or even blind you. Do not on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. periodic maintenance or replacement allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, over the vehicle’s life cycle. If a “fast charger” is used while the skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in Body Lubrication vehicle battery cables before connecting eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately Ensure that the locks and bodywork the charger to the battery. Do not use a with large amounts of water. Refer to “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. junction points, including components “Jump-Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of such as the seat guides, door hinges Emergency” for further information. (and rollers), trunk and hood are Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Charge battery as follows: periodically lubricated with lithium Keep flame or sparks away from the Before recharging the battery, turn off based grease to ensure correct, silent battery. Do not use a booster battery or all accessories and turn the engine off operation and to protect them from rust any other booster source with an output and wear. greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable by placing the ignition in the OFF mode. clamps to touch each other. Thoroughly clean the components, Disconnect the negative battery eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. Battery posts, terminals, and related cable. After lubricating, eliminate excess oil accessories contain lead and lead Connect the charger cables to the and grease. Also pay particular compounds. Wash hands after handling. battery terminals, observing the polarity attention to the hood closing devices, (+,–). to ensure correct operation. Turn on the charger. During operations on the hood, be sure to perform with the engine cold, also When finished, turn the charger off remember to check, clean and lubricate before disconnecting the battery. the locking, release and safety devices. Reconnect the negative battery Make sure the hood's secondary latch terminal. keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

235 Lubricate the external lock cylinders Note: Blade Replacement twice a year. Apply a small amount of Hot waxes applied by automatic car Proceed as follows: high-quality lubricant directly into the washers have been known to affect lock cylinder. If necessary, contact your 1. Raise the wiper arm. the wiper's ability to clean windows. authorized dealer. 2. Open the clip and slide the blade To prevent damage to the wiper Wiper Blades assembly in the direction of the arrow. blades, do not use gas, paraffin, paint Contamination of either the windshield thinner, or other solvents on or near or the blades with foreign matter can them. reduce wiper effectiveness. Common sources are insects, tree sap, and hot Be careful not to pinch hands or wax treatments used by some fingers as it may cause injury, or commercial car washes. damage the wipers. When washing or If the blades are not wiping properly, servicing the vehicle, make sure the clean the window and blades with a wiper lever is in the OFF position. good cleaner or mild detergent; then Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades rinse thoroughly with clean water. When the wipers no longer clean well, Repeat if necessary. the blades are probably worn or 07031101-36A-001 When the wiper lever is in the AUTO cracked. Replace them. Clip position and the ignition is placed in the When raising both windshield wiper

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove ON mode, the wipers may move arms, raise the driver's side wiper arm it from the arm. automatically in the following cases: first. If the windshield above the rain When lowering the wiper arms, slowly sensor is touched. lower the wiper arm from the passenger's side first while supporting If the windshield above the rain it with your hand. Forcefully lowering sensor is wiped with a cloth. the wiper arms could damage the wiper If the windshield is struck with a hand arm and blade, and may scratch or or other object. crack the windshield. If the rain sensor is struck with a Note: To prevent damage to the wiper hand or other object from inside the arms and other components, do not try vehicle. to sweep the wiper arm by hand. 07031101-36A-002 Blade Assembly and Arm

236 RAISING THE Warning! VEHICLE If the vehicle needs to be raised, see an authorized dealer which is equipped To prevent damage to the windshield let the wiper arm down easily, do not let it slap with arm hoists or workshop lifts. down on the windshield. The vehicle’s lifting points are marked on the side skirts with the symbols. 4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it out of blade holder.

07031101-36A-004 Metal Stiffeners 6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

07031101-36A-003 Blade Holder 5. Remove the metal stiffeners from each blade rubber and install them in the new blade.

07031101-36A-005 Reassemble Blade

237 WHEELS AND TIRES Note: Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is Tire Safety Information Temporary high pressure compact based on U.S. design standards. spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” Tire safety information will cover P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the aspects of the following information: molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: Tire Markings, Tire Identification size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Numbers, Tire Terminology and P215/65R15 95H. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire High flotation tire sizing is based on European — Metric tire sizing is Loading. U.S. design standards and it begins based on European design standards. with the tire diameter molded into the Tire Markings Tires designed to this standard have sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 0601085395US for the letters “LT” that are molded into Tire Markings the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Code (TIN) 2 — Size Desi- 5 — Maximum gnation Pressure 3 — Service De- 6 — Treadwear, scription Traction and Temperature Grades

238 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – "R" means radial construction, or – "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

239 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

240 Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

241 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front B-Pillar door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting Cold Tire Inflation Pressure for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Note: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

0806092795US Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

0806092796US Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 242 Tire And Loading Information Loading Steps For Determining Correct Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire Load Limit— must not exceed the load carrying (1) Locate the statement “The capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You combined weight of occupants and will not exceed the tire's load carrying cargo should never exceed XXX kg capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's inflation pressures specified on the Tire placard. and Loading Information placard in (2) Determine the combined weight “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And of the driver and passengers that Operating” section of this manual. GUID-054900418-high.tif will be riding in your vehicle. Tire And Loading Information Note: Under a maximum loaded Placard vehicle condition, gross axle weight (3) Subtract the combined weight of ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear the driver and passengers from XXX This placard tells you important axles must not be exceeded. kg or XXX lbs. information about the: For further information on GAWRs, (4) The resulting figure equals the vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer 1. Number of people that can be available amount of cargo and carried in the vehicle. to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. luggage load capacity. For 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. To determine the maximum loading example, if “XXX” amount equals 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. conditions of your vehicle, locate the 1400 lbs. and there will be five statement “The combined weight of 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the occupants and cargo should never the amount of available cargo and front, rear, and spare tires. exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. combined weight of occupants, (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

243 (5) Determine the combined weight of available cargo and luggage load of luggage and cargo being loaded capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = on the vehicle. That weight may not 295 kg) as shown in step 4. safely exceed the available cargo Note: and luggage load capacity If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, calculated in Step 4. load from your trailer will be transferred (6) If your vehicle will be towing a to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate trailer, load from your trailer will be total load, cargo/luggage, and towing transferred to your vehicle. Consult capacities of your vehicle with varying this manual to determine how this seating configurations and number and reduces the available cargo and size of occupants. This table is for luggage load capacity of your illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load vehicle. carry capacity of your vehicle. Metric Example For Load Limit For the following example, the For example, if “XXX” amount equals combined weight of occupants and 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg cargo should never exceed 865 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (392 kg).

244 GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

245 Tires — General Unequal tire pressures from one side of Tire Inflation Pressures Information the vehicle to the other can cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is vehicle to drift to the right or left. Tire Pressure listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Always drive with each tire inflated to the edge of the driver's side door. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential recommended cold tire inflation pressure. to the safe and satisfactory operation of At least once a month: your vehicle. Four primary areas are Check and adjust tire pressure with a Both under-inflation and over-inflation affected by improper tire pressure: good quality pocket-type pressure affect the stability of the vehicle and can gauge. Do not make a visual judgement Safety and Vehicle Stability produce a feeling of sluggish response when determining proper inflation. Tires or over responsiveness in the steering. Economy may look properly inflated even when Tread Wear Note: they are under-inflated. Ride Comfort Unequal tire pressures from side to Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or side may cause erratic and visible damage. Safety unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to Caution! Warning! side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. After inspecting or adjusting the tire

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Fuel Economy Improperly inflated tires are dangerous pressure, always reinstall the valve stem and can cause collisions. Underinflated tires will increase tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt Underinflation increases tire flexing and rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel from entering the valve stem, which could can result in overheating and tire failure. consumption. damage the valve stem. Tread Wear Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and Improper cold tire inflation pressures Inflation pressures specified on the chuckholes can cause damage that result can cause abnormal wear patterns and placard are always “cold tire inflation in tire failure. reduced tread life, resulting in the need pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is Overinflated or underinflated tires can for earlier tire replacement. defined as the tire pressure after the affect vehicle handling and can fail Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle has not been driven for at least suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a three hours, or driven less than 1 mile control. comfortable ride. Over-inflation (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of Unequal tire pressures can cause produces a jarring and uncomfortable three hours. The cold tire inflation steering problems. You could lose control ride. pressure must not exceed the of your vehicle. maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. 246 Check tire pressures more often if recommended safe operating speeds, The puncture is no greater than a ¼ subject to a wide range of outdoor loading and cold tire inflation pressures. of an inch (6 mm). temperatures, as tire pressures vary Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire with temperature changes. repairs and additional information. Tire pressures change by approximately Warning! Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air tires that have experienced a loss of temperature change. Keep this in mind High speed driving with your vehicle under pressure should be replaced when checking tire pressure inside a maximum load is dangerous. The added immediately with another Run Flat tire garage, especially in the Winter. strain on your tires could cause them to of identical size and service description Example: If garage temperature = 68°F fail. You could have a serious collision. Do (Load Index and Speed Symbol). (20°C) and the outside temperature = not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation capacity at continuous speeds above Run Flat Tires — If Equipped 75 mph (120 km/h). pressure should be increased by 3 psi Run Flat tires allow you the capability to (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph every 12°F (7°C) for this outside Radial Ply Tires (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation temperature condition. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is Tire pressure may increase from 2 to referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. Warning! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). build up or your tire pressure will be too Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat low. Combining radial ply tires with other types mode it has limited driving capabilities of tires on your vehicle will cause your and needs to be replaced immediately. Tire Pressures For High Speed vehicle to handle poorly. The instability A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Operation could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine It is not recommended driving a vehicle The manufacturer advocates driving at them with other types of tires. loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer safe speeds and within posted speed while a tire is in the run flat mode. limits. Where speed limits or conditions Tire Repair See the tire pressure monitoring section are such that the vehicle can be driven for more information. at high speeds, maintaining correct tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may inflation pressure is very important. be repaired if it meets the following Tire Spinning criteria: Increased tire pressure and reduced When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice vehicle loading may be required for The tire has not been driven on when conditions, do not spin your vehicle's high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to flat. wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for your authorized tire dealer or original longer than 30 seconds continuously equipment vehicle dealer for The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is without stopping. not repairable). 247 becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry When the tread is worn to the tread place with as little exposure to light as Warning! wear indicators, the tire should be possible. Protect tires from contact with replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” oil, grease, and gasoline. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. in this section for further information. Forces generated by excessive wheel Replacement Tires Life Of Tire speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A The tires on your new vehicle provide a tire could explode and injure someone. Do The service life of a tire is dependent balance of many characteristics. They not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than upon varying factors including, but not should be inspected regularly for wear 30 seconds continuously when you are limited to: and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends stuck, and do not let anyone near a Driving style. spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. that you use tires equivalent to the Tire pressure - Improper cold tire originals in size, quality and inflation pressures can cause uneven performance when replacement is Tread Wear Indicators wear patterns to develop across the tire needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread wear indicators are in the original tread. These abnormal wear patterns “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. equipment tires to help you in will reduce tread life, resulting in the Refer to the Tire and Loading determining when your tires should be need for earlier tire replacement. Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size replaced. Distance driven. designation of your tire. The Load Index SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Performance tires, tires with a speed and Speed Symbol for your tire will be rating of V or higher, and Summer tires found on the original equipment tire typically have a reduced tread life. sidewall. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle See the Tire Sizing Chart example maintenance schedule is highly found in the “Tire Safety Information” recommended. section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

0806104865NA Warning! It is recommended to replace the two Tire Tread front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously 1—WornTire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced 2—NewTire affect your vehicle’s handling. If you after six years, regardless of the remaining ever replace a wheel, make sure that tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose the wheel’s specifications match those These indicators are molded into the control and have a collision resulting in of the original wheels. bottom of the tread grooves. They will serious injury or death. appear as bands when the tread depth 248 It is recommended you contact your Summer tires do not contain the all authorized tire dealer or original season designation or mountain/ Caution! equipment dealer with any questions snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. you may have on tire specifications or Use Summer tires only in sets of four; capability. Failure to use equivalent Replacing original tires with tires of a failure to do so may adversely affect the replacement tires may adversely affect different size may result in false safety and handling of your vehicle. the safety, handling, and ride of your speedometer and odometer readings. vehicle. Warning! Tire Types

Warning! All Season Tires — If Equipped Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice All Season tires provide traction for all conditions. You could lose vehicle control, seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and resulting in severe injury or death. Driving Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, too fast for conditions also creates the or speed rating other than that specified for Winter). Traction levels may vary possibility of loss of vehicle control. your vehicle. Some combinations of between different all season tires. All unapproved tires and wheels may change season tires can be identified by the suspension dimensions and performance M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on Snow Tires characteristics, resulting in changes to the tire sidewall. Use all season tires Some areas of the country require the steering, handling, and braking of your only in sets of four; failure to do so may use of snow tires during the Winter. vehicle. This can cause unpredictable adversely affect the safety and handling handling and stress to steering and Snow tires can be identified by a of your vehicle. suspension components. You could lose “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the control and have a collision resulting in Summer Or Three Season Tires tire sidewall. serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved — If Equipped If you need snow tires, for your vehicle. select tires equivalent Summer tires provide traction in both in size and type to the Never use a tire with a smaller load wet and dry conditions, and are not original equipment index or capacity, other than what was intended to be driven in snow or on ice. tires. Use snow tires originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a If your vehicle is equipped with Summer onlyinsetsoffour; tire with a smaller load index could result in tires, be aware these tires are not tire overloading and failure. You could lose failure to do so may adversely affect the control and have a collision. designed for Winter or cold driving safety and handling of your vehicle. conditions. Install Winter tires on your Snow tires generally have lower speed Failure to equip your vehicle with tires vehicle when ambient temperatures are having adequate speed capability can ratings than what was originally less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are equipped with your vehicle and should result in sudden tire failure and loss of covered with ice or snow. For more vehicle control. not be operated at sustained speeds information, contact an authorized over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds dealer. above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to 249 original equipment or an authorized tire axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may dealer for recommended safe operating be used in the tire rotation for your Warning! speeds, loading and cold tire inflation vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, pressures. refer to an authorized tire dealer for the While studded tires improve recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these performance on ice, skid and traction Compact Spare Tire — If capability on wet or dry surfaces may spares, do not drive more than 50 mph be poorer than that of non-studded Equipped (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have tires. Some states prohibit studded limited tread life. When the tread is worn to The compact spare is for temporary the tread wear indicators, the temporary tires; therefore, local laws should be emergency use only. You can identify if use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be checked before using these tire types. your vehicle is equipped with a sure to follow the warnings, which apply to Spare Tires — If compact spare by looking at the spare your spare. Failure to do so could result in Equipped tire description on the Tire and Loading spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire Information Placard located on the Service Kit instead of a spare tire, driver’s side door opening or on the Collapsible Spare Tire — If please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire Equipped Case Of Emergency” for further descriptions begin with the letter “T” or information. “S” preceding the size designation. The collapsible spare is for temporary Example: T145/80D18 103M. emergency use only. You can identify if

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE T,S=Temporary Spare Tire your vehicle is equipped with a Caution! Since this tire has limited tread life, the collapsible spare by looking at the original equipment tire should be spare tire description on the Tire and repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on Loading Information Placard located on Because of the reduced ground clearance, your vehicle at the first opportunity. the driver’s side door opening or on the do not take your vehicle through an sidewall of the tire. automatic car wash with a compact or Do not install a wheel cover or attempt limited use temporary spare installed. to mount a conventional tire on the Collapsible spare tire description Damage to the vehicle may result. compact spare wheel, since the wheel example: 165/80-17 101P. is designed specifically for the compact Since this tire has limited tread life, the spare tire. Do not install more than one original equipment tire should be Spare Tire Matching Original compact spare tire and wheel on the repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on Equipped Tire And Wheel — If vehicle at any given time. your vehicle at the first opportunity. Equipped Inflate collapsible tire only after the Your vehicle may be equipped with a wheel is properly installed to the spare tire and wheel equivalent in look vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using and function to the original equipment the electric air pump before lowering tire and wheel found on the front or rear the vehicle. 250 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt Limited Use Spare — If Wheel And Wheel Trim to mount a conventional tire on the Equipped Care collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel All wheels and wheel trim, especially is designed specifically for the The limited use spare tire is for aluminum and chrome plated wheels, collapsible spare tire. temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the should be cleaned regularly using mild limited use spare wheel. This label (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain Warning! contains the driving limitations for this their luster and to prevent corrosion. spare. This tire may look like the original Wash wheels with the same soap equipped tire on the front or rear axle of solution recommended for the body of Compact and Collapsible spares are for your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of the vehicle. temporary emergency use only. With these this limited use spare tire affects vehicle Your wheels are susceptible to spares, do not drive more than 50 mph deterioration caused by salt, sodium (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have handling. Since it is not the same as limited tread life. When the tread is worn to your original equipment tire, replace (or chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium the tread wear indicators, the temporary repair) the original equipment tire and chloride, etc., and other road chemicals use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be reinstall on the vehicle at the first used to melt ice or control dust on dirt sure to follow the warnings, which apply to opportunity. roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and your spare. Failure to do so could result in mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. Warning! They can damage the wheel’s Full Size Spare — If Equipped protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. Limited use spares are for emergency use The full size spare is for temporary Note: Many aftermarket wheel emergency use only. This tire may look only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, cleaners contain strong acids or strong like the originally equipped tire on the do not drive more than the speed listed on alkaline additives that can harm the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated wheel surface. not. This spare tire may have limited to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on tread life. When the tread is worn to the your Tire and Loading Information Placard tread wear indicators, the temporary located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the use full size spare tire needs to be rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace replaced. Since it is not the same as (or repair) the original equipment tire at the your original equipment tire, replace (or first opportunity and reinstall it on your repair) the original equipment tire and vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

251 Snow Chains Caution! Caution! The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations of each country. In certain countries, tires Avoid products or automatic car washes Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a marked with code M+S (Mud and that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline bristle brush, metal polishes or oven Snow) are considered as winter additives or harsh brushes. These products cleaner. These products may damage the equipment; therefore their use is and automatic car washes may damage wheel's protective finish. Such damage is equivalent to that of the snow chains. the wheel's protective finish. Such damage not covered by the New Vehicle Limited is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar The snow chains may be applied only Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is to the front wheel tires. Check the Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. tension of the snow chains after the first recommended. few feet have been driven. Note: If you intend parking or storing When cleaning extremely dirty wheels your vehicle for an extended period including excessive brake dust, care after cleaning the wheels with wheel Warning! must be taken in the selection of tire cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few and wheel cleaning chemicals and minutes before doing so. Driving the equipment to prevent damage to the vehicle and applying the brakes when Using tires of different size and type (M+S, wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Snow) between front and rear axles can stopping will reduce the risk of brake cause unpredictable handling. You could SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their rotor corrosion. lose control and have a collision. equivalent is recommended or select a Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for Wheels aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and Caution! such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. 252 Tire rotation means moving the wheels to a different position, with respect to Caution! Caution! the vehicle. During rotation, inspect tires for correct balance. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, Using snow chains with tires with observe the following precautions: non-original dimensions may damage the Because of restricted traction device vehicle. clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important Using different size or type (M+S, snow, that only traction devices in good condition etc.) tires between front and rear axle may are used. Broken devices can cause adversely affect vehicle driveability, with the serious damage. Stop the vehicle risk of losing control of the vehicle and immediately if noise occurs that could resulting accidents. indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further Tire Rotation use. Recommendations 07031402-FRT-001 Install device as tightly as possible and Rotation Diagram then retighten after driving about ½ mile The front and rear tires are subject to (0.8 km). different loads and stress due to The single wheel will therefore operate steering, maneuver and braking. For on a different axle and, where possible, Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). this reason they are subject to uneven on the opposite side of the vehicle. wear. To resolve this problem, tires Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns Note: and large bumps, especially with a loaded should be rotated at the appropriate vehicle. time. Rotate tires periodically. Irregular tire Do not drive for a prolonged period on The following rotation methods must wear is dangerous. To equalize tread dry pavement. NOT be used with one-way wear for maintaining good unidirectional tires! This type of tires can performance in handling and braking, Observe the traction device rotate the tires every 6,200 miles manufacturer’s instructions on the method only be switched from the front axle to the rear axle and vice versa, keeping (10,000 km), or sooner if irregular wear of installation, operating speed, and develops. conditions for use. Always use the them on the same side of the vehicle. suggested operating speed of the device Rotate one-way unidirectional tires To equalize tread wear, rotate the manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) at (48 km/h). and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern only from the latest or sooner if irregular wear Do not use traction devices on a front to rear, not from side to side. Tire develops. FCA recommends to rotate compact spare tire. performance will be reduced if rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) to help from side to side. increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly. 253 Because your vehicle is not DEPARTMENT OF the norm due to variations in driving equipped with a spare tire, you cannot TRANSPORTATION habits, service practices, and do a tire rotation safely with the jack UNIFORM TIRE differences in road characteristics that may come with your vehicle if so QUALITY GRADES equipped. Contact an authorized and climate. dealer for tire rotation. The following tire grading Traction Grades Also, inspect them for uneven wear and categories were established by the The Traction grades, from highest damage. Abnormal wear is usually National Highway Traffic Safety to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. caused by one or a combination of the Administration. The specific grade following: These grades represent the tire's rating assigned by the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as Incorrect tire pressure manufacturer in each category is measured under controlled Improper wheel alignment shown on the sidewall of the tires conditions on specified government on your vehicle. Out-of-balance wheel test surfaces of asphalt and Severe braking All passenger vehicle tires must concrete. A tire marked C may After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to conform to Federal safety have poor traction performance. specification and inspect the wheel nuts requirements in addition to these for tightness. grades.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE With Tire Pressure Monitor System Treadwear Warning! (TPMS) The Treadwear grade is a The TPM system must be initialized after adjusting the tire pressure, to comparative rating, based on the The traction grade assigned to make the system operate normally. wear rate of the tire when tested this tire is based on straight-ahead Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring under controlled conditions on a braking traction tests, and does System” in “Safety” for further specified government test course. not include acceleration, information. For example, a tire graded cornering, hydroplaning, or peak Rotate unidirectional tires and radial 150 would wear one and one-half tires that have an asymmetrical tread traction characteristics. pattern only from front to rear, not from times as well on the government side to side. Tire performance will be course as a tire graded 100. The Temperature Grades reduced if rotated from side to side. relative performance of tires The Temperature grades are A (the depends upon the actual highest), B, and C, representing the conditions of their use, however, tire's resistance to the generation of and may depart significantly from heat and its ability to dissipate heat, 254 when tested under controlled STORING THE do not allow humidity to evaporate from conditions on a specified indoor VEHICLE the surface of the vehicle. laboratory test wheel. If the vehicle is left inactive for longer Inflate the tires at a pressure of Sustained high temperature can than a month, the following precautions +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher than should be observed: recommended on the tire placard and cause the material of the tire to check it periodically. degenerate and reduce tire life, and Park the vehicle in covered, dry and if possible well-ventilated premises and excessive temperature can lead to Do not drain the engine cooling slightly open the windows. system. sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of Check that the parking brake is not Any time the vehicle is left inactive for activated. two weeks or more, operate the air performance, which all passenger conditioning system with engine idling vehicle tires must meet under the Disconnect the negative battery terminal and check the battery charge. for at least five minutes, setting external Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Repeat this check once every three air and with fan set to maximum speed. Standard No. 109. Grades B and A months during storage. This operation will ensure appropriate represent higher levels of lubrication for the system, thus If the battery is not disconnected minimizing the possibility of damage to performance on the laboratory test from the electrical system, check its the compressor when the system is wheel, than the minimum required state of charge every thirty days. operated again. by law. Clean and protect the painted parts Note: After placing the ignition in the using protective wax. OFF mode and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute Warning! Clean and protect the shiny metal before disconnecting the electrical parts using special compounds supply from the battery. When available commercially. reconnecting the electrical supply to the The temperature grade for this tire Sprinkle talcum powder on the battery, make sure that the ignition in is established for a tire that is windshield and rear window wiper the OFF mode and the driver side door properly inflated and not rubber blades and lift them off the is closed. overloaded. Excessive speed, glass. under-inflation, or excessive Cover the vehicle with a fabric or loading, either separately or in perforated plastic sheet, paying combination, can cause heat particular care not to damage the buildup and possible tire failure. painted surface by dragging any dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not use compact plastic sheets which 255 BODYWORK Preserving The not wash the vehicle after it has been Paintwork left in the sun or with the hood hot: this Protection From may alter the shine of the paintwork. Atmospheric Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned The vehicle is equipped with the best immediately to prevent the formation of rust. in the same way as the rest of the available technological solutions to vehicle. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of These include: washing the vehicle: the frequency Note: depends on the conditions and Painting products and systems environment in which the vehicle is Avoid parking under trees; the sap which give the vehicle resistance to used. dropped by trees makes the paint corrosion and abrasion. work go dull and increases the For example, it is advisable to wash the possibility of corrosion. Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) vehicle more often in areas with high steel sheets, with high resistance to levels of atmospheric pollution or salted Bird droppings must be washed off corrosion. roads. immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. Spraying of plastic parts, with a To correctly wash the vehicle, follow protective function in the more exposed these instructions: Etching caused by acid rain or points: underdoor, inner fender, edges, If high pressure jets or cleaners are industrial fallout etc. used to wash the vehicle, keep a Cause:

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Use of “open” boxed sections to distance of at least 1.3 ft (40 cm) from Industrial pollutants and vehicle prevent condensation and pockets of the bodywork to avoid damage or emissions drift into the air and mix with moisture which could favor the alteration. Build up of water could rain or dew to form acids. These acids formation of rust inside. cause damage to the vehicle in the long can settle on a vehicle's finish. As the term. water evaporates, the acid becomes Use of special films to protect concentrated and can damage the against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. Wash the vehicle using a low pressure jet of water if possible. finish. rear fender, doors, etc.). The longer the acid remains on the Corrosion Warranty Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy surface, the greater the chance is for solution over the bodywork, frequently damage. Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion rinsing the sponge. Warranty against perforation due to rust Prevention: of any original element of the structure Rinse well with water and dry with a It is necessary to wash and wax your or bodywork. For the general terms of jet of air or a chamois leather. vehicle to preserve its finish according this Corrosion Warranty, refer to the Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door to the instructions in this section. These Warranty Booklet. frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) steps should be taken immediately after with special care, as water may you suspect that acid rain has settled stagnate more easily in these areas. Do on your vehicle's finish. 256 Damage caused by bird Another method is to cover the affected Note: dropping/insects/tree sap area with dampened newspaper for one The paint chipping zone varies with to two hours. After removing the Problem: the speed of the vehicle. For example, newspaper, rinse off the loosened Bird droppings contain acids. If these when travelling at 55 mph (90 km/h), debris with water. are not removed they can eat away the the paint chipping zone is 164 ft clear and color base coat of the Water marks (50 m). vehicle's paintwork. Problem: In low temperatures, a vehicle's When insects stick to the paint surface Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can finish hardens. This increases the and decompose, corrosive compounds contain harmful minerals such as salt chance of paint chipping. form. These can erode the clear and and lime. If moisture containing these color base coat of the vehicle's minerals settles on the vehicle and Chipped paint can lead to rust paintwork if they are not removed. evaporates, the minerals will forming on your vehicle. Before this Tree sap will harden and adhere concentrate and harden to form white happens, repair the damage by using permanently to the paint finish. If you rings. The rings can damage your FCA touch-up paint according to the scratch the sap off while it is hard, vehicle's finish. instructions in this section. Failure to repair the affected area could lead to some vehicle paint could come off with Prevention: it. serious rusting and expensive repairs. It is necessary to wash and wax your Prevention: Follow all label and container directions vehicle to preserve its finish according when using a chemical cleaner or It is necessary to have your vehicle to the instructions in this section. These polish. Read all warnings and cautions. washed and waxed to preserve its finish steps should be taken immediately after according to the instructions in this you find water marks on your vehicle's Maintaining The Finish section. This should be done as soon finish. Washing as possible. Paint chipping To help protect the finish from rust and Bird droppings can be removed with a deterioration, wash your vehicle soft sponge and water. If you are Problem: thoroughly and frequently, at least once travelling and these are not available, a Paint chipping occurs when gravel a month, with lukewarm or cold water. moistened tissue may also take care of thrown in the air by another vehicle's the problem. The cleaned area should tires hits your vehicle. If the vehicle is washed improperly, the be waxed according to the instructions How to avoid paint chipping: paint surface could be scratched. Here are some examples of how scratching in this section. Insects and tree sap are Keeping a safe distance between you could occur: best removed with a soft sponge and and the vehicle ahead reduces the water or a commercially available chances of having your paint chipped The vehicle is washed without first chemical cleaner. by flying gravel. rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.

257 The vehicle is washed with a rough, Do not spray water in the engine dry, or dirty cloth. compartment. Otherwise, it could Caution! result in engine-starting problems or The vehicle is washed at a car wash damage to electrical parts. that uses brushes that are dirty or too stiff. When washing and waxing the Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or vehicle, be careful not to apply strong detergents containing highly alkaline Cleansers or wax containing or caustic agents on chrome plated or excessive force to any single area of abrasives are used. anodized aluminium parts. This may the vehicle hood. Otherwise, you could Note: FCA is not responsible for damage the protective coating; also, dent the vehicle. cleaners and detergents may discolor or scratches caused by automatic car deteriorate the paint. washes or improper washing. Do not use automatic car washing Scratches are more noticeable on machines and car washing devices vehicles with darker paint finishes. using high water pressure. Pay special attention to removing salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign material When the wiper lever is in the AUTO Make sure that the fuel door is from the underside of the fenders, and position and the ignition is placed in the closed and lock the doors. Otherwise, make sure the drain holes in the lower ON mode, the wipers may move the fuel door may be forcefully opened edges of the doors and rocker panels automatically in the following cases: by water pressure causing damage to are clean. the vehicle or fuel door. If the windshield above the rain Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, To minimize scratches on the vehicle's sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. industrial fallout, and similar deposits

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE paint finish: If the windshield is struck with a hand can damage the finish if not removed or other object from either outside or Rinse off any dirt or other foreign immediately. When prompt washing inside the vehicle. matter using lukewarm or cold water with plain water is ineffective, use a mild before washing. soap made for use on vehicles. Note: Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water Thoroughly rinse off all soap with Keep hands and scrapers clear of and a soft cloth when washing the lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow the windshield when the wiper lever is vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth. soap to dry on the finish. in the AUTO position and the ignition is After washing the vehicle, dry it with a placed in the ON mode as fingers Rub gently when washing or drying clean chamois to prevent water spots could be pinched or the wipers and the vehicle. from forming. wiper blades damaged when the Take your vehicle only to a car wash Waxing wipers activate automatically. If you are that keeps its brushes well maintained. going to clean the windshield, be sure Your vehicle needs to be waxed when the wipers are turned off completely Do not use abrasive cleansers or water no longer beads on the finish. (when it is most likely that the engine is wax that contain abrasives. Always wash and dry the vehicle before left running) this is particularly waxing it. In addition to the vehicle important when clearing ice and snow. 258 body, wax the metal trim to maintain its To prevent corrosion on brigh-tmetal It will do more harm than good to wet lustre: surfaces, apply wax or chrome down the road grime without removing preservative and rub it to a high lustre. it. Use wax which contains no abrasives. Waxes containing abrasive During cold weather or in coastal areas, The lower edges of doors, rocker will remove paint and could damage cover bright-metal parts with a coating panels, and frame members have drain bright metal parts. of wax or preservative heavier than holes that should not be clogged. usual. It would also help to coat them Water trapped there will cause rusting. Use a good grade of natural wax for with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or Aluminium Wheel metallic, mica, and solid colors. some other protective compound. Maintenance When waxing, coat evenly with the A protective coating is provided over sponge supplied or a soft cloth. the aluminium wheels. Special care is Caution! Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth. needed to protect this coating. Note: A spot remover to remove oil, Note: Do not use any detergent other tar, and similar materials will usually also Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or than mild detergent. Before using any take off the wax. Rewax these areas strong detergents containing highly alkaline detergent, verify the ingredients. even if the rest of the vehicle does not or caustic agents on chrome plated or Otherwise, the product could discolor need it. anodized aluminium parts. This may result or stain the aluminium wheels. in damage to the protective coating and Repairing Damage To cause discoloration or paint deterioration. The Finish Caution! Deep scratches or chips on the finish Underbody Maintenance should be repaired promptly. Exposed Road chemicals and salt used for ice metal quickly rusts and can lead to and snow removal and solvents used Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive major repairs. for dust control may collect on the cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on Note: If your vehicle is damaged and underbody. If not removed, they will aluminium wheels. They may damage the needs metal parts repaired or replaced, speed up rusting and deterioration of coating. make sure the body shop applies such underbody parts as fuel lines, corrosion prevention materials to all frame, floor pan, and exhaust system, Note: Always use a sponge or soft parts, both repaired and new. This will even though these parts may be coated cloth to clean the wheels. Rinse the prevent them from rusting. with anti-corrosive material. wheels thoroughly with lukewarm or Bright-Metal Thoroughly flush the underbody and cold water. Also, be sure to clean the Maintenance wheel housings with lukewarm or cold wheels after driving on dusty or salted roads to help prevent corrosion. Use tar remover to remove road tar and water at the end of each winter. Try also insects. Never do this with a knife or to do this every month. similar tool. Pay special attention to these areas because they easily hide mud and dirt. 259 Convertible Top Do not get any car wax on the Maintenance convertible top. Caution! The convertible top is made of a special If you do, remove it with a good high-grade material, but if it's not taken leather cleaner or mild detergent good care of, hardening, staining, and Automatic and high-pressure car (about 5% solution). loss of lustre will result. Maintain it washes are harmful to a convertible top. under these guidelines. Avoid them. Let the convertible top dry completely before lowering after Washing Do not spray water directly on the area applying treatment or dressing. Do not wait until the convertible top where the window glass and the convertible top meet. This would probably gets really dirty before cleaning it. Dirt cause water to enter the interior. that's there too long will cause Drain Filter Cleaning deterioration. Do not spray water directly on the seam If leaves or other matter block the drain area of the body and the convertible top as filter, water may enter the vehicle. Clean Before washing, remove dust and it could result in water penetrating the the drain filter at least once a year. coarse particulate with a soft brush. interior. Gently clean the convertible top with Do not wipe the convertible top using a synthetic neutral detergent, lots of alcohol, chlorine bleach, or organic water, and a soft brush. solvents such as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, they may cause Rinse it thoroughly with clean water discoloration or stains. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE to remove all the soap. Too much treatment on the convertible Wipe it as dry as you can before the top can be as damaging as too little. Follow water dries on it. the manufacturer's directions. Do not over do it! Then allow it to dry completely before lowering it. Note: 07040110-122-001AB Drain Filter Some leather treatment products can ruin the convertible top's gloss. Be Proceed as follows: careful of the one you choose. 1. Check the position of the drain filter Test on an inconspicuous, small with your hand from behind the bow. corner of the convertible top if you are not sure.

260 3. Remove leaves and other matter accumulated in the drain filter. Caution! 4. Reinstall the drain filter in the reverse order of the removal procedure. High water temperature and high water Note: Make sure that the drain filter is pressure car washers are available securely attached to its designated depending on the type of high pressure car position by pushing it until the tab washer device. If the car washer nozzle is locks. Water may enter the vehicle if the put too close to the vehicle or aimed at one drain filter is not secured to its area for an extended period of time, it designated position. For this operation could deform plastic parts or damage the 07040110123001 go to an authorized dealer. paint. Drain Filter Location Plastic Part Do not use wax containing compounds 1 — Drain Filter Maintenance (polish). Otherwise, it could result in paint 2 — Bow damage. When cleaning the plastic lenses of the lights, do not use gasoline, paraffin, In addition, do not use an electrical or air 2. Remove the drain filter while rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the frictional pressing the tab. acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline heat generated could result in deformation detergents. of plastic parts or paint damage. Otherwise, these chemical agents can discolor or damage the surfaces resulting in a significant loss in functionality. If plastic parts become inadvertently exposed to any of these chemical agents, flush with water immediately. If plastic parts such as the bumpers become inadvertently exposed to chemical agents or fluids such as 07040110124001 Drain Filter Tab gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid, it could cause discoloration, staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any such chemical agents or fluids using a soft cloth immediately.

261 INTERIORS Vinyl Seats And Fabric Parts Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl Caution! with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl cleaner. Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol, Warning! chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such Fabric as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric it may cause discoloration or stains. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Note: purposes. Many are potentially flammable, Clean it with a mild soap solution good and if used in closed areas they may cause for upholstery and carpets. Scratches or nicks on the panels respiratory harm. Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: they Remove fresh spots immediately with a and metallic trim resulting from the use might explode. Aerosol cans must not be fabric spot cleaner. of a hard brush or cloth may not be exposed to a temperature exceeding To keep the fabric looking clean and repairable. 122°F (50°C). When the vehicle is exposed fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color Be particularly careful when to sunlight the internal temperature can will be affected, it can be stained easily, greatly exceed this value. cleaning high gloss panels and metallic and its fire-resistance may be reduced. trim as they can be easily scratched. Note: Use only recommended cleaners and procedures. Others may affect Lap / Shoulder Belt Caution! appearance and fire-resistance. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Interior Panels Warning! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect When the interior panels need to be repellents, suntan lotions, or hand cleaned, use soft material such as a sanitizers, to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may soft cloth soaked in clean water and A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a cause permanent damage. Wipe away wrung out well and lightly wipe off dirt collision and leave you with no protection. immediately. from the surface. Inspect the belt system periodically, If a panel requires further cleaning, wipe checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damage caused by these type of dirt off using a soft cloth soaked in mild Damaged parts must be replaced products may not be covered by your New immediately. Do not disassemble or modify Vehicle Limited Warranty. detergent (about 5% solution) and wipe the system. Seat belt assemblies must be off any remaining detergent using a replaced after a collision if they have been Rubbing the interior side of the cloth soaked in clean water and wrung damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn convertible top vigorously with a stiff brush out well. webbing, etc.). or cloth may cause damage.

262 Clean the webbing with a mild soap Instrument panel precautions Window Interiors solution recommended for upholstery or Prevent caustic solutions such as If the windows become covered with an carpets. Follow instructions. Do not perfume and cosmetic oils from oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them bleach or dye the belts, this may contacting the instrument panel. They with glass cleaner. Follow the directions weaken them. will damage and discolor the instrument on the container. After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry panel. If these solutions get on the Note: Do not scrape or scratch the the belt webbing and make sure there instrument panel, wipe them off inside of the window glass. It could is no remaining moisture before immediately. damage the thermal filaments. retracting them. Note: Never use alcohol, gasoline and Plastic And Coated derivatives to clean the instrument Parts panel lens. Caution! Clean interior plastic parts with a damp Caution! cloth (if possible made from microfiber), When washing the inside of the window and a solution of water and neutral, glass, use a soft cloth dampened in non-abrasive detergent. Do not use glazing agents. Glazing agents lukewarm water, gently wiping the thermal To clean oily or persistent stains, use contain ingredients which may cause filaments. Use of glass cleaning products specific products free from solvents and discoloration, wrinkling, cracks and peeling. could damage the thermal filaments. designed to maintain the original appearance and color of the Instrument Panel Top components. When cleaning, it is recommended that Remove any dust using a microfiber you use a clean towel dampened in a cloth, if necessary moistened with mild detergent to remove debris. water. The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these may leave residues. Caution!

If the surface is rubbed harshly, it could result in the surface being damaged leaving white scratch marks.

263 Leather Parts — If If the leather gets wet such as from Equipped rain, also remove moisture and dry it as Caution! soon as possible. Caution! Note: Sand and dust on the seat surface may Because genuine leather is a natural damage the overcoat of the genuine leather surfaces and accelerate wear Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based material, its surface is not uniform and . it may have natural scars, scratches, and/or Ketone based cleaning products to Greasy soiling on genuine leather may clean leather seats, as damage to the seat and wrinkles. cause molding and stains. may result. To maintain the quality for as long Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth as possible, periodical maintenance, may cause damage. Remove dust and sand first using a about twice a year, is recommended. vacuum cleaner or other means, then Do not wipe the leather using alcohol, wipe dirt off using a soft cloth with a chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such leather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, it may cause discoloration or stains. mild soap. Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap If the seats get wet, promptly remove using a cloth soaked in clean water and moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining wrung out well. moisture on the surface may cause deterioration such as hardening and SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth shrinkage. and allow the leather to further dry in a well-ventilated, shaded area. Exposure to direct sunlight for long periods may cause deterioration and shrinkage. When parking the car under direct sunlight for long periods, shade the interior using sunshades. Do not leave vinyl products on the seats for long periods as they may affect the leather quality and coloring. If the cabin temperature becomes hot, the vinyl may deteriorate and adhere to the genuine leather.

264 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 266 RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE ...... 267 ENGINE...... 269 TRANSMISSION ...... 270 BRAKES ...... 271 SUSPENSIONS ...... 272 STEERING ...... 273 DIMENSIONS...... 274 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 275 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....276 PERFORMANCE ...... 278

265 IDENTIFICATION DATA Identification Numbers Model Plate The model plate is located on the left side of door pillar.

10010104-122-001AB 10010106-121-001 Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Emission Control Information Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label Tire Pressure Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The tire pressure label is located on the The motor vehicle safety standard label left side of door pillar. is located on the left side of door pillar.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 10010103121001 Model Plate Location Chassis Number/Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number is located below the left side (driver side) of the windshield.

10010107-121-002

10010109-121-001 Tire Pressure Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Engine Number Label The engine number label is located on Vehicle Emission Control the engine. Information Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The vehicle emission control information label is located under the hood. 266 RECOMMENDED Always check the tire inflation Checking Tire Pressure pressures on a regular basis according TIRE INFLATION Proceed as follows: PRESSURE to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in 1. When you check the air pressure, On the tire label you will find the conjunction with the information in this make sure the tires are cold - meaning recommended tire inflation pressure in Owner's Manual. Driving your vehicle they are not hot from driving even a both psi and kPa for the tires installed with under-inflated tires is dangerous. mile. as original equipment on the vehicle. Under-inflation is the most common It is very important that the inflation cause of failures in any kind of tire and 2. Remove the cap from the valve on pressure of the tires on your vehicle is may result in severe cracking, tread one tire. maintained at the recommended separation or “blowout”, with 3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the pressure. unexpected loss of vehicle control and valve. You should check the tire pressure increased risk of injury. Under-inflation regularly to insure that the proper increases sidewall flexing and rolling 4. Add air to achieve recommended air inflation pressure is maintained. resistance, resulting in heat buildup pressure. and internal damage to the tire. It 5. If you overfill the tire, release air by Note: results in unnecessary tire stress, pushing on the metal stem in the center irregular wear, loss of control and Tire pressures listed on the vehicle of the valve. Then recheck the pressure accidents. A tire can lose up to half of placard or tire information label indicate with your tire gauge. the recommended cold tire inflation its air pressure and not appear to be pressure, measured when the tires are flat. It is impossible to determine 6. Replace the valve cap. cold, after the vehicle has been parked whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them. 7. Visually inspect the tires to make for at least three hours. As you drive, sure there are no nails or other objects the temperature in the tire warms up, embedded that could poke a hole in the increasing the tire pressure. tire and cause an air leak. 8. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other irregularities.

267 Glossary Of Terms kPa Vehicle Load Limit Tire Placard Kilopascal, the metric unit for air The maximum value of the combination pressure. weight of occupants and cargo. A label indicating the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended psi Bead Area of the Tire inflation pressure, and the maximum Pounds per square inch, the English Area of the tire next to the rim. weight the vehicle can carry. unit for air pressure. Sidewall Area of the Tire Tire Identification Number (TIN) B-pillar Area between the bead area and the A number on the sidewall of each tire The structural member at the side of tread. providing information about the tire the vehicle behind the front door. brand and manufacturing plant, tire Tread Area of the Tire size, and date of manufacture. Original Equipment (OE) Area on the perimeter of the tire that Describes components originally contacts the road when it's mounted Inflation Pressure equipped on the vehicle. on the vehicle. A measure of the amount of air in a tire. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

268 ENGINE Engine

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 80.4 Total displacement (cm³) 1368 Compression ratio 9.8:1 Maximum power (kW) 122 Maximum power (HP) 164 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500 Maximum torque (Nm) 250 Maximum torque (lb.-ft.) 184 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 Spark plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) Maximum 15% Fuel Ethanol Content Note: When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.

Warning!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into account, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

269 TRANSMISSION

Engine Traction Type Description 6-speed manual (*) / 6-speed 1.4 Turbo Multi Air RWD Manual/Automatic Automatic Transmission(**) (*) If equipped with manual transmission (**) If equipped with automatic transmission TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

270 BRAKES

Engine Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Ventilated (floating type 11 in Solid (floating type 11 in 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Mechanical (lever type) diameter) diameter) Note: Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

271 SUSPENSIONS

Engine Front Rear 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Double wishbone with stabilizer bars Multilink with stabilizer bars TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

272 STEERING

Engine Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m) Type Double pinion electric power assist system 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 30.8 (9.4) (DP - EPAS) - rack and pinion

273 DIMENSIONS

Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unloaded. Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10000555-122-333AB Vehicle Dimension Chart

ABCDEF 159.6 (4054 mm) 90.9 (2309 mm) 48.5 (1232 mm) 58.9 (1496 mm) 68.5 (1740 mm) 59.1 (1503 mm)

Weights Curb Weight: 2477 lbs (1124 kg) (if equipped with manual transmission) / 2516 lbs (1141 kg) (if equipped with automatic transmission).

274 FLUID CAPACITIES

Item Capacities Fuel tank 11.9 (gallons) / 45 (liters) Engine oil (without oil filter replacement) 3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters) Engine oil (with oil filter replacement) 4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters) Coolant (with manual transmission) 7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters) Coolant (with automatic transmission) 7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters) Manual transmission oil 2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters) Automatic transmission fluid 7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters) Rear differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters) Limited slip differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters) Brake fluid (& clutch fluid) 0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

275 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids And Lubricants Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant Specification Replacement interval We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the Engine oil requirements of FCA Material Standard According to Scheduled Servicing Plan MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for Coolant According to Scheduled Servicing Plan FIAT Spider

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life Gear Manual transmission oil Oil for FIAT Spider Mopar Automatic Transmission Long Life Automatic transmission fluid Fluid for FIAT Spider Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil for FIAT Rear differential oil Spider Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive for FIAT Limited slip differential oil Spider We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If Brake/clutch fluid DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required characteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

276 Caution!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

277 PERFORMANCE Performance Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version MPH (km/h) 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 164HP 130 (209.2) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

278 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .280 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .....280 WARRANTYINFORMATION.....282 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .282 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .283

279 SUGGESTIONS FOR IF YOU NEED Owner's telephone number (home OBTAINING SERVICE ASSISTANCE and office) FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized Authorized dealer name Prepare For The dealer are vitally interested in your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Appointment satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Vehicle delivery date and mileage If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the right papers with Warranty service must be done by an FIAT Customer Center authorized dealer. We strongly you, as well as your warranty folder. All P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI work to be performed may not be recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your 48321–8004 covered by the warranty. Discuss Phone: additional charges with the service vehicle the best, and are most manager. Keep a maintenance log of concerned that you get prompt and 1-888-242-6342 your vehicle's service history, as this high quality service. The manufacturer's can often provide a clue to the current authorized dealer have the facilities, FIAT Canada Customer problem. factory-trained technicians, special Center CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE tools, and the latest information to Prepare A List ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Make a written list of your vehicle's in a timely manner. problems or the specific work you want This is why you should always talk to an Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) done. If you've had an accident or work authorized dealer service manager first. 387-9983 French done that is not on your maintenance Most matters can be resolved with this In Mexico Contact log, let the service advisor know. process. Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, Be Reasonable With If for some reason you are still not 1240 satisfied, talk to the general manager or Requests Sante Fe C.P. 05109 owner of the authorized dealer. They If you list a number of items and you want to know if you need assistance. Mexico, D. F. must have your vehicle by the end of In Mexico City: 5081-7568 If an authorized dealer is unable to the day, discuss the situation with the Outside Mexico City: service advisor and list the items in resolve the concern, you may contact order of priority. At many authorized the manufacturer's customer center. 1-800-505-1300 dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle Any communication to the at a minimal daily charge. If you need a manufacturer's customer center should rental, it is advisable to make these include the following information: arrangements when you call for an Owner's name and address appointment. 280 Puerto Rico And U.S. Service Contract facilities, tools, and training to assure Virgin Islands that you are absolutely delighted with You may have purchased a service the ownership experience. You will be Customer Service Chrysler International contract for a vehicle to help protect pleased with their sincere efforts to Services LLC you from the high cost of unexpected resolve any warranty issues or related repairs after the manufacturer's New P.O. Box 191857 concerns. San Juan 00919-1857 Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the Tel.: (787) 782-5757 manufacturer's service contracts. If you Warning! Fax: (787) 782-3345 purchased a manufacturer's service Customer Assistance contract, you will receive Plan For The Hearing Or Provisions and an Owner Identification Engine exhaust (internal combustion Speech Impaired Card in the mail within three weeks of engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or (TDD/TTY) the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service emit, chemicals known to the State of To assist customers who have hearing contract, call the manufacturer's California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In difficulties, the manufacturer has Service Contract National Customer installed special TDD addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian and certain products of component wear (Telecommunication Devices for the residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / contain, or emit, chemicals known to the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. (800) 387-9983 French). State of California to cause cancer and Any hearing or speech impaired The manufacturer will not stand behind birth defects, or other reproductive harm. customer, who has access to a TDD or any service contract that is not the a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in manufacturer's service contract. It is the United States, can communicate not responsible for any service contract with the manufacturer by dialing other than the manufacturer's service 1-800-380-CHRY. contract. If you purchased a service Canadian residents with hearing contract that is not a manufacturer's difficulties that require assistance can service contract, and you require use the special needs relay service service after the manufacturer's New offered by Bell Canada. For TTY Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for please refer to the contract documents, Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to and contact the person listed in those connect with a Bell Relay Service documents. operator. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in 281 WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY To contact NHTSA, you may call INFORMATION DEFECTS the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: for the terms and provisions of FCA US And Washington, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to LLC warranties applicable to this http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New or cause injury or death, you should Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, immediately inform the National Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also Highway Traffic Safety obtain other information about motor Administration (NHTSA) in addition vehicle safety from to notifying FCA US LLC. http://www.safercar.gov . If NHTSA receives similar In Canada complaints, it may open an If you believe that your vehicle has CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a a safety defect, you should contact safety defect exists in a group of the Customer Service Department vehicles, it may order a recall and immediately. Canadian customers remedy campaign. However, who wish to report a safety defect NHTSA cannot become involved in to the Canadian government should individual problems between you, contact Transport Canada, Motor your authorized dealer or FCA US Vehicle Defect Investigations and LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

282 PUBLICATION Owner's Manuals ORDER FORMS These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service To order the following manuals, you and engineering specialists to acquaint may use either the website or the you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. phone numbers listed below. Visa, Included are starting, operating, Mastercard, American Express, and emergency and maintenance Discover orders are accepted. procedures as well as specifications, Service Manuals capabilities and safety tips. These comprehensive Service Manuals Call toll free at: provide the information that students and professional technicians need in 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) solving, maintaining, servicing, and Or repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: vehicle, system, and/or components is www.techauthority.com written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

283 INDEX Automatic Temperature Control Checking levels...... 231 About Your Brakes ...... 150 (ATC)...... 52 Child Restraint ...... 128 ABS system...... 112 Automatic Transmission ...... 153 Child Restraints INDEX Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ...... 156 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 63 Child Restraints ...... 128 Adaptive Front Lighting System Clean Air Gasoline ...... 173 (AFS) ...... 42 B-Pillar Location ...... 242 Cleaning Additives, Fuel ...... 174 Battery (maintenance)...... 234 Wheels ...... 251 Advanced Keyless Entry System Battery charging procedure ...... 235 Climate Control ...... 45 Key Left In Trunk ...... 21 Battery recharging ...... 235 Close The Hood ...... 69 Key left In Vehicle ...... 21 Blind Spot Monitoring...... 114 Compact Spare Tire...... 250 Locking Doors ...... 21 Body and underbody warranty . . . .256 Contract, Service ...... 281 Passive Entry ...... 21 Body lubrication ...... 235 Convertible Top ...... 70 Request Switch ...... 21 Bodywork (care and maintenance). .256 Convertible top maintenance .....260 Unlocking Doors ...... 21 Boot, Convertible Top Lowering ....70 Cooling AirBag...... 131,135 Boot, Convertible Top Precautions . .73 Air Conditioning ...... 50 Advance Front Air Bag . . . .131,135 Boot, Convertible Top Raising .....71 Cupholders ...... 64 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 147 Brake System...... 150 Customer Assistance ...... 280 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .145,222 Brake/clutch fluid (level check) . . . .233 FrontAirBag...... 147 Brakes ...... 150,271 Data Recorder, Event ...... 145 Maintaining Your Air Bag Bright-metal maintenance ...... 259 Daytime Running Lights ...... 40 System ...... 145 Diagnostic System, Onboard .....109 Air Bag Maintenance ...... 145 Camera, Rear...... 167 Dimensions ...... 274 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 246 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 175 Disabled Vehicle Towing .....220,221 Alarm Center...... 60 Seat Storage Compartment Driver's Seat Back Tilt ...... 33 Vehicle Security Alarm ...... 24,25 Certification Label ...... 176 Driving in flooded area ...... 181 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 24,25 Changing A Flat Tire.....203,204,237 Driving tips ...... 178 Aluminium wheel maintenance . . . .259 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 239 Automatic Dimming Mirror...... 36 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Electric power steering ...... 74 Automatic Headlights...... 40 Indicator Light) ...... 110 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 37 Electronic Brake Control System Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 175 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 173 Traction Control System ...... 112 Exterior Lights ...... 38 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 173 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Gear selector positions ...... 154 Control) ...... 159 Flash-To-Pass ...... 40 GVWR...... 176 Emergency fuel filler door release . .176 Flashers Emergency Key ...... 16 Hazard Warning ...... 184 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 184 Emergency, In Case Of ...... 208 Turn Signal ...... 41 Hazardous driving ...... 178 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 184 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 218 Head Restraints ...... 34 Jacking ...... 203,204,237 Fluid And Lubricants ...... 276 Headlight ...... 38 Jump Starting ...... 217 Fluid Capacities ...... 275 Headlights Overheating ...... 219 Fog Lights...... 41 Adjusting...... 42 The Headlight Abroad Towing...... 220,221 Follow Me Home ...... 40 High Beam ...... 40 Emission control system ...... 74 Front lights (light bulbs) ...... 187 Passing ...... 40 Emission Control System Front Wipers Heavy-duty use of the vehicle Maintenance...... 110 Wiper Operation ...... 42 (scheduled servicing) ...... 225 Engine ...... 269 Fuel HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .58 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 175 Additives ...... 174 Hood Release ...... 68 Fails To Start ...... 218 Clean Air ...... 173 How to use this manual ...... 3 Flooded, Starting ...... 218 Ethanol ...... 173 Jump Starting ...... 217 Materials Added ...... 174 Identification Data ...... 266 Overheating ...... 219 Methanol ...... 173 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 36 Starting ...... 20,218 Fuel Consumption Display...... 85 Instrument Cluster Display Engine compartment ...... 231 Fuel Economy Monitor ...... 84 Information Display ...... 76,77 Engine coolant (level check) ...... 232 Fuel filler cap ...... 175 Interior Lights...... 62 Engine oil (level check) ...... 232 Fuel filler door...... 175 Interiors ...... 262 Environment protection systems ....74 Fuse block (engine compartment) . .197 Internal Equipment ...... 60 Essential information ...... 3 Fuse block (interior) ...... 201 Jack Location...... 203 Ethanol ...... 173 Fuses (interior) ...... 195 Jack Operation ...... 203,204,237 Event Data Recorder ...... 145 Fuses (underhood)...... 196 Jump Starting...... 217 KeyFob...... 14 Manual, Service ...... 283 Power Emergency Key ...... 14 Methanol...... 173 Brakes ...... 150 Programming Additional Key Mirrors...... 35 Door Locks ...... 26,31 INDEX Fobs ...... 24 Automatic Dimming ...... 36 Mirrors ...... 37 Key-In Reminder...... 20 Electric Remote ...... 37 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .124 Exterior Folding ...... 37 Pretensioners Lane Change And Turn Signals ....41 Outside ...... 35 Seat Belts ...... 127 Lane Change Assist...... 41 Rearview ...... 36 Protection from atmospheric Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 123,125 agents (bodywork) ...... 256 Leaving Home Light System ...... 42 Occupant Restraints ...... 122 Radar Sensors ...... 162 Life Of Tires ...... 248 Onboard Diagnostic System .....109 Radial Ply Tires ...... 247 Lights Operating Precautions ...... 109 Radio Frequency Daytime Running ...... 40 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 35,36 General Information ...... 19,23 Fog ...... 41 Overhead light (bulb replacement) . .194 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 184 Radio transmitter and mobile Overheating, Engine...... 219 phones ...... 5 Passing ...... 40 Overloading ...... 182 Rear Camera ...... 167 Turn Signal ...... 41 Owner's Manual (Operator Rear lights (light bulbs) ...... 187 Loading Vehicle ...... 176 Manual) ...... 283 Rear Park Assist System...... 163 Tires ...... 242 Rearview Mirrors...... 36 Locks Paint damage touch-up ...... 259 PowerDoor ...... 26,31 Parking Brake...... 151 Recommended Tire Inflation Pressure ...... 267 Passing Light ...... 40 Recorder, Event Data ...... 145 Maintaining the finish ...... 257 Performance ...... 278 Recreational towing ...... 178 Maintenance Monitor ...... 81 Periodic checks (scheduled Reformulated Gasoline ...... 173 Maintenance procedures...... 235 servicing) ...... 225 Refueling procedure...... 175 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Personal Settings ...... 105 Engine) ...... 110 Personalization Features ...... 105 Refueling the vehicle ...... 173 Manual Climate Control System ....48 Placard, Tire And Loading Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 127 Heating ...... 50 Information...... 242 Replacement Tires...... 248 Manual transmission ...... 152 Plastic part maintenance...... 261 Replacing a bulb ...... 184 Replacing exterior light bulbs .....187 Adjustment ...... 33 Wheel, Tilt ...... 35 Replacing fuses ...... 194 Heated ...... 33 Storage ...... 60 Replacing interior light bulbs .....194 Seatback Release ...... 33 Storing the vehicle ...... 255 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 282 Tilting ...... 33 Sun Visor ...... 61 Restraint, Head ...... 34 Seats and fabric parts (cleaning) . . .262 Supplemental Restraint System - Restraints, Child ...... 128 Security Alarm AirBag...... 131,135 Security Alarm ...... 24,25 Suspensions ...... 272 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 282 Sentry Key Symbols...... 3 Safety Information, Tire ...... 238 Key Programming ...... 24 safety systems ...... 112 Service Assistance ...... 280 Tilt Steering Column ...... 35 Saving fuel and protection of the Service Contract ...... 281 Tire And Loading Information environment ...... 178 Service Manuals ...... 283 Placard ...... 242 Scheduled servicing...... 224 Shift Lever Override ...... 156 Tire chains...... 180 Seat Belt Shift position indication...... 154 Tire Markings ...... 238 Energy Management Feature . . .128 Shoulder Belts ...... 123,125 Tire Rotation ...... 253 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 123,125 Signals, Turn ...... 41 Tire Safety Information ...... 238 Pregnant Women ...... 124 Snow chains ...... 252 Tire Service Kit ...... 208 Seat Belt Extender ...... 126 Snow Tires ...... 249 Tires...... 246,250,254 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 127 Spare Tire ...... 203,250,251 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 248 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 127 Sport Mode ...... 158 Air Pressure ...... 246 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 127 Starting ...... 20,218 Changing ...... 203,204,237 Seat Belts ...... 122 Engine Fails To Start ...... 218 Compact Spare ...... 250 Child Restraint ...... 128 Starting And Operating...... 20,218 Flat Changing ...... 208 Extender ...... 126 Starting Procedures...... 20,218 General Information ...... 246,250 Front Seat ...... 122,123 Starting the engine ...... 149 High Speed ...... 247 Pregnant Women ...... 124 Steering ...... 273 Inflation Pressures ...... 246 Pretensioners ...... 127 Column Lock ...... 35 Jacking ...... 203,204,237 Rear Seat ...... 123 Tilt Column ...... 35 Life Of Tires ...... 248 Seats ...... 33 Load Capacity ...... 242,243 Pressure Monitor System Transmission ...... 270 Wheel And Wheel Trim ...... 251 (TPMS) ...... 114 Tread Wear Indicators...... 248 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care...... 251 Quality Grading ...... 254 Trunk Lid Wheels and tires ...... 238 INDEX Radial ...... 247 Closing ...... 67 Window and headlight washer fluid Replacement ...... 248 Opening ...... 66 (level check) ...... 234 Safety ...... 238,246 Trunk light (bulb replacement).....194 Window interiors (cleaning) ...... 263 Sizes ...... 239 Turn Signals...... 41 Windows Snow Tires ...... 249 Driver/Passenger Window Spare Tire ...... 203,250,251 Undercoating ...... 259 Controls ...... 56 Spinning ...... 247 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 254 Power Windows ...... 56 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 248 Window Lockout ...... 58 ToOpenDeckLid...... 66 Vehicle Loading ...... 176,243 Windshield...... wiper blades (replacing) .236 ToOpenHood...... 68 Vehicle modifications/alterations.....4 Windshield Wipers ...... 42 Towing Vent Operation ...... 45 Windstop ...... 65 Disabled Vehicle ...... 220,221 Winter driving ...... 180 Towing Eyes...... 220 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 184 Wiper blades ...... 236 Towing trailers ...... 178 Warranty Information ...... 282 Wrecker Towing ...... 220,221 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Washer Operation...... 42,44 System) ...... 119 Washers, Windshield ...... 42 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT The antenna cable should be as short as practical and Special design considerations are incorporated into this routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio only fully shielded coaxial cable. frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person- Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to nel. The following must be observed during installation. ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). The positive power connection should be made directly Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. normal may require special precautions. The negative power connection should be made to body All installations should be checked for possible interfer- sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. ence between the communications equipment and the This connection should not be fused. vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. 2017 FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH

® 2017 17BAFX-124-AC FIAT 124 SPIDER ABARTH ©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Third Edition Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.